Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning,

8/8/2019 Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning,

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/heating-ventilating-air-conditioning 1/226

INCH-POUND

MIL-HDBK-1003/315 NOVEMBER 1995

MILITARY HANDBOOK

HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING,

AND DEHUMIDIFYING SYSTEMS

AMSC N/A AREA FACR

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE:DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIMITED.

ded by IHS Licensee=Austal USA/5973492001, User=wills, mark

Not for Resale, 10/08/2010 09:05:03 MDTeproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS

--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



ABSTRACT

This handbook is for the use of design and construction of NavalFacilities heating, ventilating, air conditioning, anddehumidifying systems.

ii



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```, ,̀```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 h 9 7 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 L b î î 2Lb IFOREWORD

This handbook is one of a series developed for instruction on thepreparation of Navy facilities engineering and design criteriadocuments. This handbook uses, to the maximum extent feasible,national and institute standards in accordance with NavalFacilities Engineering Command (NAVFACENGCOM) policy. Do notdeviate from this handbook for NAVFACENGCOM criteria without

prior approval of NAVFACENGCOM Criteria Office, Code 15.

Recommendations for improvement are encouraged from within theNavy, other Government agencies, and the private sector andshould be furnished on the DD Form 1426 provided inside the backcover to Commander, Naval Facilities Engineering Command,Mr. Tom Harris, Code 15, 1510 Gilbert Street, Norfolk, VA23511-2699; phone commercial (804) 322-4206, facsimile machine(804) 322-4416.

THIS HANDBOOK SHALL NOT BE USED AS A REFERENCE DOCUMENT FORPROCUREMENT OF FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION. IT IS TO BE USED IN THE

PURCHASE OF FACILITIES ENGINEERING STUDIES AND DESIGN (FINALPLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND COST ESTIMATES). DO NOT REFERENCE ITIN MILITARY OR FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS OR OTHER PROCUREMENTDOCUMENTS.

iii



--` , ,

, , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~

f l IL -HDBK-L003/3 R 9 9 9 9 5 7 0 0271700 8 b 8 IIMIL-HDBK-1003/3

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING CRITERIA MANUALS

Criteria Manual

MIL-HDBK-1003/1

MIL-HDBK-1003/2

DM-3.04

MIL-HDBK-1003/6

MIL-HDBK-1003/7

MIL-HDBK-IOO3/8A

DM-3-09

DM-3-10

MIL-HDBK-I003/11

MIL-HDBK-IOO3/12

MIL-HDBK-1003/13

DM-3.14

DM-3.15

MIL-HDBK-1008B

Title

Plumbing (Proposed)

incinerators

Refrigeration Systems for ColdStorage

Compressed Air and Vacuum Systems(Proposed)

Central Heating Plants

Fossil Fuel Power Plants (Proposed)

Exterior Distribution of UtilitySteam, High Temperature Water (HTW),Chilled Water (CHW), Fuel Gas andCompressed Air

Elevators, Escalators, Dumbwaiters,Access Lifts, and Pneumatic TubeSystems

Noise and Vibration Control forMechanical Equipment

Diesel Electric Generating Plants

Boiler Controls

Solar Heating of Buildings andDomestic Hot Water

Power Plant Acoustics

Air Pollution Control Systems forBoilers and Incinerators

Industrial Ventilating Systems

Design Procedures for PassiveSolar Buildings

Fire Protection for FacilitiesEngineering Design and Construction

-AWESTDIV

WESTDIV

WESTDIV

WESTDIV

NFESC

NFESC

NORTHDIV

WESTDIV

ARMY

NAVFAC

NAVFAC

NFESC

ARMY

NFESC

NAVFAC

NFESC

NAVFAC

iv



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~

flIL-HDBK-L003/3 = 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 027L70L 7T4 M

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

HEATING. VENTILATING. AIR CONDITIONING. AND DEHUMIDIFYING SYSTEMS

CONTENTS

Section11.11.21.31.41.51.6

Section 22.12.1.12.1.1.1

2.1.1.22.1.1.32.1.1.42.1.22.1.2.12.1.2.22.1.2.32.1.2.4

2.1.2.52.22.2.1

2.2.22.2.2.12.2.2.22.2.2.32.2.2.42.2.32.2.3.12.2.3.22.2.3.32.2.3.42.2.42.2.4.12.2.4.22.2.4.32.2.52.2.5.12.2.5.22.2.5.32.2.62.2.6.1

PaaeINTRODUCTIONScope ..................................... 1Cancellation .............................. 1Purpose ................................... 1Policy .................................... 1Referenced Criteria ....................... 2Safety .................................... 2

GENERALLoad and Energy Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Load Calculation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Load Calculation Form .....................Design Conditions .........................Variable Air Volume (VAV) Systems . . . . . . . . .Outdoor Air Load ..........................Energy Analysis ...........................Building Orientation ......................Architectural Features ....................Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Electrical Lighting System Selection(Daylighting)

Equipment Selection .......................General ...................................Heating Equipment .........................Boiler Sizing .............................Boiler Fuel ...............................Auxiliary Equipment .......................Terminal Equipment ........................Cooling Equipment .........................General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Packaged DX Equipment .....................

Special Energy Conservation Features . . . . . .

Central Chilled Water Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .Auxiliary Equipment - Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ventilation Equipment .....................General ...................................Humid Climates ............................Engineered Smoke Control System . . . . . . . . . . .Humidification Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General ...................................Steam Humidifiers .........................Atomizing Humidifiers .....................Temperature Controls ......................General ...................................

444

44

44445

5566

6677

7788

889

101010101010101010

V



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~~~~~

MIL-HDBK-3003 /3 m 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 0 2 b 3 0 m

Paae2.2.6.2 Direct Digital Controls (DDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112.2.6.3 Temperature Control Drawings and

Specifications ............................ 112.2.6.4 Automatic Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

2.2.7 Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) 112.2.8 instrumentation ........................... 112.2.8.1 Indicating Instruments .................... 112.2.8.2 Recording Instruments ..................... 112.2.8.3 Combination Instrument and Controls . . . . . . . 132.2.8.4 Multi-Point Remote Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132.2.8.5 Control Board ............................. 13

2.2.8.6 Desired Instrumentation Characteristics . . . 132.2.9 Metering .................................. 142.2.10 Piping Systems ............................ 142.2.10.1 Sizing .................................... 142.2.10.2 Pipe Expansion ............................ 14

2.2.11 Duct System Design ........................ 142.2.11.1 HVAC Systems .............................. 142.2.11.2 Restriction on Use of Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2.3 Noise and Vibration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162.4 System and Equipment Performance . . . . . . . . . . 162.4.1 Cooling Systems ........................... 162.4.1.1 Central Air Conditioning Systems . . . . . . . . . . 162.4.1.2 Unitary Air Conditioning Systems . . . . . . . . . . 162.4.1.3 Room Air Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.4.1.4 Built-up Systems .......................... 172.4.2 Heating Systems ........................... 17

2.4.2.2 Central Heating Plants .................... 182.4.2.3 Snow Melting Systems ...................... 18

2.4.3.1 Constant-Volume Systems ................... 182.4.3.2 Variable Air Volume (VAV) Systems . . . . . . . . . 192.4.3.3 Economizer Cycle .......................... 19

2.4.4 Duct, Pipe, and Equipment Insulation . . . . . . 192.4.5 Computer Programs for Load Calculation . . . . 19

2.6 Radon Mitigation Systems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

2.2.12 Industrial Ventilation and Exhaust Systems 15

2.4.2.1 Individual Heating Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.4.3 All-Air Systems ........................... 18

2.5 Mechanical Room Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202.5.1 Self-contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) . . .20

Section 3 APPLICATIONS3.1 General ................................... 23

3.3 Air Force Projects ........................ 233.4 Tropical Engineering ...................... 23

3.2 All Building Types ........................ 23

3.5 Electronic Facilities ..................... 233.6 Air Cargo Terminal ........................ 29

vi


Not for Resale, 10/08/2010 09:05:03 MDTproduction or networking permitted without license from I HS

--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



3.73.83.93.10

3.11

3.123.133.143.153.163.173.183.18.13.18.23.18.3

3.18.43.18.53.18.63.19

Section 44.14.1.14.1.24.1.34.1.44.1.54.1.64.1.74.1.7.14.1.7.24.1.8

Section 55.15.25.2.15.2.2

5.2.35.35.3.15.3.1.15.3.1.25.3.25.3.35.3.3.15.3.3.2

PaaeAircraft Line Operations Building . . . . . . . . . 29Photographic Building ..................... 29Naval Air Station Control Tower . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Liquid Oxygen and Nitrogen Facilities . . . . . 30

Maintenance Facilities for Ammunition.Explosives. and Toxics .................... 30General Maintenance Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Hospital. Dental. and Medical Facilities . . 31Family Housing ............................ 31Bachelor Enlisted Quarters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Industrial Ventilation .................... 32Kitchen Ventilation ....................... 32Kitchen Equipment Exhaust Hoods . . . . . . . . . . . 32Exhaust Systems ........................... 32

Calculation of Exhaust Hood Air Volume Rate 33Exhaust Hood Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Air Curtains .............................. 36Laundries ................................. 36

Bachelor Officer Quarters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Fire Protection ........................... 33

INFORMATION REQUIRED ON DRAWINGSGeneral .................................. 38

Identification of Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Equipment Schedules ...................... 38Duct Pressure Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Riser Diagrams ........................... 38Controls ................................. 38Maintainability .......................... 39Symbols and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40General .................................. 40Specifics ................................ 40Building Column Lines and Room Names . . . . . 40

LOAD CALCULATIONSGeneral .................................. 41Heating Load ............................. 41Transmission ............................. 41Infiltration and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Total Heating Load ....................... 42Cooling Load ............................. 42Transmission ............................. 42Walls and Roof ........................... 42Glass .................................... 42Infiltration and Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Internal Loads ........................... 44People Loads ............................. 44Lights and Equipment ..................... 44

vii



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-3003/3 9999970 0273704 403

Section 66.16.1.16.1.2

6.1.36.1.3.16.1.3.26.1.3.36.1.3.46.1.3.56.1.3.66.1.3.76.1.3.86.1.3.96.1.46.1.4.1

6.1.4.26.1.4.36.1.56.26.2.16.2.1.16.2.1.26.2.1.36.2.1.46.2.1.56.36.4

6.56.66.76.86.9

PaaeAIR DISTRIBUTIONDuct Design for HVAC Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Sizing General ............................ 46Equal Friction Method Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Ductwork General .......................... 46Round Ducts ............................... 46Rectangular Ducts ......................... 46Access Doors .............................. 48Flexible Ducts ............................ 48

Rooftop Ductwork .......................... 48Glass Fiber Ductwork ...................... 48Balancing Dampers for HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Fan Systems Effect Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Ductwork Details .......................... 51Branches .................................. 51

Elbows .................................... 51Offsets and Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Testing and Balancing ..................... 51Fans for WA C Systems ..................... 51Fan Selection ............................. 51Major Types of HVAC Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Size ...................................... 51Sound Rating .............................. 52Static Pressure Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52VAV Fan Selection ......................... 59Economizer Cycle .......................... 59Terminal Equipment ........................ 59

Louvers ................................... 60Filters for VAV Systems ................... 60Access for Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . 61VAV System Design ......................... 62Ductwork Pressure-Velocity Classification . 62

Section 7 PIPING SYSTEMS7.1 General ................................... 657.1.1 Piping Design Factors ..................... 65

7.1.3 System Pressure Loss ...................... 657.1.4 Piping Layouts

............................65

7.1.7 Packing-Type Expansion and Ball Joints .... 66

7.1.8 Bellows Expansion Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667.1.9 Supports and Anchors ...................... 66

7.1.10 Flexible Hose ............................. 68

7.2 Water Systems ............................. 69

7.2.1 General ................................... 69

7.1.2 Pipe Friction Loss ........................ 65

7.1.5 Expansion ................................. 657.1.6 Expansion Loop ............................ 66

viii



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~

M I L - H D B K - L 0 0 3 / 3 9999970 0273705 3 4 T .I

7.2.1.17.2.1.27.2.1.37.2.1.47.2.1.57.2.1.67.2.1.77.2.27.2.2.17.2.2.27.2.2.37.2.2.47.2.2.57.2.2.67.2.37.2.3.1

7.2.3.27.2.3.37.2.3.47.37.3.17.3.27.3.2.17.3.37.3.3.17.3.3.27.3.3.37.3.3.4

7.3.3.57.3.3.67.3.3.77.3.47.3.57.3.5.17.3.5.2

7.3.67.3.6.17.3.6.2

7.3.6.3

Section 88.18.1.18.1.1.18.1.1.28.1.2

PaaeExterior Water Piping Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Water Velocity ............................ 69Water Treatment ........................... 69Pipe Sizing ............................... 70

Valve and Fitting Pressure Drops . . . . . . . . . . 70Return Arrangements ....................... 70Air Vents ................................. 70

Hot Water Piping .......................... 70

Expansion Tanks and Air Separator . . . . . . . . . 73

Hot Water Heating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Hot Water Coils ........................... 70

Domestic Hot Water Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Heat Exchangers ........................... 74Pumps ..................................... 79Chilled Water ............................. 80Pipe Size ................................. 80

Coils ..................................... 80Expansion Tanks ........................... 80Pumps ..................................... 80Steam ..................................... 81General ................................... 81Low Pressure Steam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Pipe Sizing ............................... 81

High Pressure Steam Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Pipe Sizing ............................... 81Boiler .................................... 89Heat Exchanger ............................ 89

Steam Pressure Regulating Valves . . . . . . . . . . 89Condensate Pumps and Flash Tank . . . . . . . . . . . .92Steam Coils - General ..................... 92

Freezing of Steam Coils - General . . . . . . . . . 97

Steam Traps ............................... 92Boilers ................................... 92

Freezing Due to Air Stratification . . . . . . . . 97Freezing Due to Build-up of Condensate inthe Coil .................................. 98Refrigerant Piping ........................ 101General ................................... 101Sizing .................................... 101

Arrangement ............................... 101

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

Choice of Controls ........................ 104

Factors to Select Control Systems . . . . . . . . .104

General Requirements ...................... 104

A Guide to Choose Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 04

Designing DDC Systems ..................... 105

ix



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 1 7 0 b 286 II

8.28.2.18.2.28.2.3

8.2.48.2.58.2.68.2.7

8.2.88.2.98.2.10

8.2.11

8.2.12

8.2.138.38.48.5

8.68.6.18.6.28.6.38.6.3.1

8.6.3.28.6.3.38.6.48.6.4.18.6.58.6.68.6.7

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

PaueStandard Sequences of Operations . . . . . . . . . .107General Requirements ...................... 107Operation of W A C System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07Operation of Outside Air. Return Air. and

Exhaust (Relief) Air Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107Operation of Filtration System . . . . . . . . . . . .107Operation of Freeze Protection . . . . . . . . . . . .108Operation of Smoke Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08Operation of Chilled Water Coil Discharg8Control ................................... 108Operation of Preheat Coil Control . . . . . . . . .108Operation of Heating Coil Control . . . . . . . . .108operation of Space Control (Single ZoneUnit) ..................................... 108Operation of Space Control (Multizoneunit) ..................................... 109

Operation of Space Control (VAV TerminalUnit . ressure Dependent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Operation of Supply Duct Pressure Control . 09Single Zone unit Sequence of Operation . . . . 09Multizone Unit Sequence of Operation . . . . . . 10Variable Air Volume (VAV) Unit Sequence ofOperation ................................. 119Commissioning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Functional Performance Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Preparation for Acceptance Testing . . . . . . . . 25System Static Checkout .................... 125Observation ............................... 125

Calibration ............................... 125Operation ................................. 126System Dynamic Checkout ................... 126Controller Manual-Tuning Procedure . . . . . . . .126Procedures for Single Zone Control System .128Procedures for Multizone Control System ... 30Variable Air Volume (VAV) Control System .. 32

Section 9 EQUIPMENT LOCATION9.1 General ................................... 1359.2 Specific Considerations ................... 1359.2.1 Noise

.....................................135

9.2.2 Access for Operations and Maintenance . . . . .1359.2.3 Blocked Access ........................... 1369.2.4 Emission of Odors ......................... 1369.2.5 Cooling Tower Vibration ................... 136

Section 10 FUNDAMENTAL DRAWING DETAILS10.1 General ................................... 13710.2 Specifics ................................. 137

X



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` `

` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~ ~ ~~ ~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 D 9 9 5 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 1 7 0 7 112 =

10.2.110.2.210.2.310.2.4

10.2.5

Section 1111.111.211.311.411.511.611.711.811.9

Section 1212.112.212.3

APPENDIX AAPPENDIX BAPPENDIX CAPPENDIX D

Figure 1

234567891011

12

13

PaueSystem Diagrams and Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . .137Equipment Schedules ....................... 137Riser Diagrams ............................ 137Duct Pressure Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Symbols and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137RULES OF THUMB GUIDANCEGeneral ................................... 144Air Conditioning Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Heating Capacity .......................... 144Moisture Loads ............................ 144

Chilled Water Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Hot Water ................................. 144Condenser Water ........................... 144Steam ..................................... 144Condensate ................................ 144

FIRE PROTECTION AND SMOKE CONTROLGeneral ................................... 146System Design ............................. 146Engineered Smoke Control System . . . . . . . . . . .147

APPENDICES

Energy Conservation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148Engineered Smoke Control Systems . . . . . . . . . .172Design DO'S and Don'ts VAV Systems . . . . . . . . 73Variable Speed Drives (VFD's) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

FIGURES

Floor Penetration for Sub-SlabDepressurization System ................... 22

Damper Installation ....................... 49Fan System Effect Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3

Duct Sizing ............................... 47

Duct Branches ............................. 54Duct Branches ............................. 55Duct Elbows ............................... 56

Duct Offsets and Transitions

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Hooked Louver Blade ....................... 62

Duct Pressure Class Designation . . . . . . . . . . . 64Friction Loss for Water in CommercialSteel Pipe (Schedule 40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Friction Loss for Water in Copper Tubing(Types K, L, M) ........................... 71Friction Loss for Water in Plastic Pipe(Schedule 80) ............................. 72

xi



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~ ~

MIL-HDBK-2003/3 I 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 0 8 0 5 9 W

141516

17

18

19

20

21

2223242526272829

30

313 233

34

35

3 6

37383940Al

A2A3

Paae

Diaphragm Expansion Tank ................... 76Connections to Converter for Hot Water

Domestic Hot Water Generator and HeatingHot Water Boiler Piping Connection . . . . . . . . . 78Chart for Flow Rate and Velocity of Steamin Schedule 40 Pipe Based on SaturationPressure of 30 psig ........................ 85Chart for Flow Rate and Velocity of Steamin Schedule 40 Pipe Based on SaturationPressure of 50 psig ........................ 86Chart for Flow Rate and Velocity of Steamin Schedule 40 Pipe Based on SaturationPressure of 100 psig ....................... 87Chart for Flow Rate and Velocity of Steam

in Schedule 40 Pipe Based on SaturationPressure of 150 psig ....................... 88PRV.. Low Pressure .......................... 90Two Stage PRV .............................. 91Flash Tank and Duplex Condensate Pump Unit . 93Steam Coils ................................ 94Steam Tempering Coils ...................... 95Low Pressure Drip .......................... 96Boiler Connections ......................... 97Air Stratification to Coil During Freeze-up

Nonfreeze Coil Piping ...................... 100

Refrigerant Coil ........................... 102Compressor Piping .......................... 103Control System Schematic for Single ZoneHVAC System XX .............................. 111Control System Schematic for Multizone HVACSystem XX ................................... 115Control System Schematic for VAV W A CSystem XX .................................. 121Schematic Hot Water and Chilled WaterBalancing Diagr m ......................... 138Schematic Airflow Balancing Diagr m . . . . . . . . 39Hot Water Riser Diagr m .................... 141Notes on Drawing Riser Diagr m . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Designating Duct Pressure Classes . . . . . . . . . .143Occupied/Unoccupied Hot Water ResetSchedule ................................... 149Thermostat Setpoints Diagr m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151Exhaust Air Heat Recovery With Rotary AirWheel ...................................... 154

Closed Expansion Tank ...................... 75

Heating System ............................. 77

Conditions ................................. 99

xii



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

`

- - -



~ ~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 W 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 0 9 T 9 5 M

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

Al

All

A12

A13

A14

A15

Table 1

23

4567

891011

12

PacreExhaust Air Heat Recovery With CounterflowPattern Static Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Exhaust Air Heat Recovery with CrossflowPattern Static Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Method With HeatPipe ....................................... 157Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Method WithRunaround (Closed Loop) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .158Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Method WithRunaround (Open Loop) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160Heat of Light Recovery Method With LightTroffer .................................... 162Heat of Light Recovery Method With InducedAir ........................................ 163Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery WithConventional Refrigeration Machine Using

Hot Water Coil ............................. i65Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery WithConventional Refrigeration Machine UsingRefrigerant Coil ........................... 166Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery WithInternal Source Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery WithSingle Bundle Condenser Water CircuitMethod and Open Cooling Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery WithDouble Bundle Condenser Water CircuitMethod ..................................... 169

TABLES

Recommended Air Conditioning Systems forVarious Buildings .......................... 3Typical Instrument Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Applicable Criteria by Building Type........ 24Thermal Currents Charts .................... 34Safety Factor Chart ........................ 35Duty Group Chart ........................... 35Major Types of W A C Fans ................... 58

Piping Materials ........................... 67Water Velocities ........................... 69Flow Rate in lb/h of Steam Schedule 40 Pipe. 82Return Main and Riser Capacities forLow-Pressure System, ib/h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Comparative Capacity of Steam Lines atVarious Pitches for Steam and CondensateFlowing in Opposite Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

xiii



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



13

14

15

16

171819202 122

REFERENCES

GLOSSARY

~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9999970 027lJ7LO 7 0 7 rn

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

PaffeSteam Pipe Capacities for Low-PressureSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Common Types of Steam Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Equipment for Single Zone W A C ControlSystem XX

..................................113

Equipment for Multizone W A C Control SystemXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Equipment for VAV W A C Control System XX . . . 23

Typical Utility Fan Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140Sound Data Schedule ........................ 140Cooling Coil Schedule ...................... 140

Air Conditioning Load Estimating Factors . . . 45Typical Load Breakdown of DehumidifiedWarehouse .................................. 145

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

.............................................. 210

xiv



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```, ,̀```,,`-`-`,,̀ ,,`,`,,`---



~~

~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 E 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 027171L 643

Section 1: INTRODUCTION

1.1 ScoDe. This handbook provides the Naval FacilitiesEngineering Command's policy and criteria for selection anddesign of heating, ventilating, air conditioning (WAC), anddehumidifying systems as applied to Naval shore facilities.

1.2 Cancellation. This handbook cancels and supersedesNAVFAC design manual DM-3.03, Heatina, Ventilation, AirConditionina and Dehumidifvina Systems dated January 1987.

1.3 PurDose. Policy and criteria included in this handbookare provided to ensure quality and consistency in design of HVACand dehumidifying systems with minimum life cycle costs whichsatisfy functional and operational requirements of Navalfacilities and which provide a healthy and safe environment forfacility occupants.

1.4 Policv. Design of HVAC and dehumidifying systems shallbe in accordance with guidelines included in this handbook. Thematerial included in Sections 5 through 12 of this handbook isprovided for information and should be applied only as requiredto supplement the experience of the designer or design reviewer.NAVFAC policy is to select simple, easy to maintain and operate,W A C systems designed based upon well established principles andconstructed of proven materials that satisfy space temperature,humidity, and indoor air quality (IAQ) requirements within energybudgets prescribed in MIL-HDBK-1190, Facilitv Plannina and DesianGuide. Use the following procedures for selection and design ofW A C systems:

a) Ensure that passive building design features, e.g.,building orientation, shading, building envelope, and insulation

are optimized to reduce heating and cooling loads. Such passivetechniques reduce the requirement to use complex, maintenanceintensive, W A C systems and equipment to meet the facility energybudget.

b) Place special emphasis on keeping W A C systems,including controls, simple and easy to operate and maintain.

Table 1, par. 2.4, and subparagraphs provide recommendations ontypes of air conditioning systems that should be considered forthe most common applications.recommended types should be selected based on functionalrequirements, ease of maintenance, and the design energy budget.For example, a system requiring extensive use of complexcontrolled devices and associated controls (e.g., complex heatrecovery systems) should only be considered when there are nopractical alternatives to obtain design energy budgets prescribed

The least complex of the

1



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 ï ï ï ï ï 7 0 02'73732 5 8 T iE

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

in MIL-HDBK-1190. Otherwise, less complex, constant volumeunitary or air handler systems with zone control should be used.

c) Consider the level and responsiveness of maintenanceavailable at the customer's activity when selecting the WA Csystem. Success of the W A C system is dependent upon acceptanceof the system by the local staff responsible for routinemaintenance. The staff should be able to understand theoperating principles and control logic. Maintenance of thesystem should not require skills and knowledge beyond theircapability.maintenance and removal.

Ensure adequate space is provided for equipment

d) Consider the types of systems currently installedat an activity when making system selection for new facilities.Seek to provide consistency in system types unless a simpler,less maintenance intensive system can be used in the new

f c i y

e) Specify training of activity personnel comparableto the degree of system and controls complexity provided andconsidering level of existing knowledge. In addition, providecustomer guidance relative to maintenance personnel (includinglevel of knowledge) or contract maintenance support required forthe WA C system.

1.5 Referenced Criteria. The principal criteria referencesused in this handbook in order of priority are:

a) MIL-HDBK-1190.

b) NAVFAC design manuals and military handbooks.(Whenever a design manual is revised, the design manual isconverted to a military handbook.)

c) American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHFWE) handbooks and standards.If a particular subject is not specifically addressed in thishandbook, ASHRAE criteria apply. For criteria that is notavailable in A S H M criteria, use the best available information

applicable to the design requirement, including State and localcodes as applicable.

1.6 Safety. Design systems to meet requirements ofNational Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 90A, Standard for theInstallation of Air Conditionins and Ventilatins Svstems and NFPA90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heatins and AirConditionins Svstems and Department of Labor, 29 CFR Part 1910,OccuDational Safetv and Health Standards.

2



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-3003/3 I 999970 0 2 7 3 7 3 3 4 3 b

Table 1Recommended Air Conditioning Systems

for Various Buildings

Building

AdministrationApt. HousesAuditoriumsBachelor QuartersBakeriesChapelsCommunicationsFamily HousingGymnasiumsHangar (w/Lean-To)HospitalsLaundriesSchoolsShopsTheatersTransmittersWarehouses

NOTES

(1) System Types:

A

X

XXXXXXX

XXXXXXX

-

-

SYSTEMS

B

X

XXXXX

-

---XXXXXX-

C

XXXXXXXX-

-

XXXXXX

X

F

X

XXX

XXX

XX

XXXX

(3

-

-

-

-

H

XXXXXXXX--XX

X----

I

X

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

(3)

-

A - Single Duct SystemB - Dual Duct SystemC - Multizone SystemD - Variable Volume SystemE - Perimeter Zone Air System

F - Fan Coil SystemG - Induction SystemH - Heat Pump SystemI - Evap. Cooling System

(2) Depends on building configuration.

( 3 ) Depends on local weather conditions. Refer toMIL-HDBK-1190.

3



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



Section 2: GENERAL

2.1 Load and Enerav Calculations

2.1.1 Load Calculation Procedures. Refer to the ASHRAE

Handbook, Fundamentals, for the acceptable method of performingload and energy calculations.

2.1.1.1 Load Calculation Form. Except for small buildings andminor renovation, less than 8000 square feet, loads should becalculated using a computer program which applies one of themethods in the ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals, Chapters 25 and 26.Simplified load calculation equations are reproduced in Section 5of this handbook.smaller buildings with hand calculations.

These simplified equations may be used on

2.1.1.2 Desian Conditions. Select indoor and outdoor summer

and winter design conditions in accordance with MIL-HDBK-1190.If a known micro-climate condition exists at the site, or ifbuilding site location is not shown in NAVFAC Publication P-89,Enaineerina Weather Data; consult the Navy design manager orproject leader (DM or PL) for instructions.

2.1.1.3 Variable Air Volume (VAVI Svstems. For VAV systems,refer to Appendix C and ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals, for theacceptable method.

2.1.1.4 Outdoor Air Load

a) Infiltration. Use infiltration rates and themethod of calculation prescribed in ASHRAE Handbook,Fundamentals.

b) Ventilation. Use ventilation rates for IAQprescribed in ASHRAE Standard 62, Ventilation for AcceptableIndoor Air Oualitv and the method of calculation included inASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals.

2.1.2 Enercw Analysis

2.1.2.1 Buildina Orientation. Building orientation,fenestration, lighting, and geometry can have a profound effecton the building energy consumption, system selection, and zoning.Therefore, the HVAC designer should consult with the architectduring the early concept stage to optimize the overall design.

2.1.2.2 Architectural Features. The building mass, tightnessof construction, window treatment, occupancy zoning, and othercharacteristics can also impact the HVAC design. These features

4



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -

` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~ ~~~~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 II 9999970 0273735 2 9 9 I

need early consideration by the design disciplines to achieve thebest overall design concept. Consider using ENVSTD 24, aDepartment of Energy (DOE) envelope system performance compliancecalculation program to assist the architect and mechanicalengineer to evaluate the proposed facilities’ compliance with

ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Enerav Efficient Desian of New BuildinasExcept Low-Rise Residential Buildinas, 10 CFR 435, andMIL-HDBK-1190 design energy targets. ENVSTD 24 is available onthe Construction Criteria Base (CCB) CD-ROM, or from ASHRAE orDOE.

2.1.2.3 Mechanical Svstem Selection. Life cycle cost analysisof candidate systems should be used to determine the best systemselection within the parameters cited in par. 1.4. Includeelectrical demand charges as well as energy charges in the

analysis.particular forms of energy or types of equipment, such as ice

storage or gas-fired adsorption chillers. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1190for guidance on the application of this procedure.

Include rebates offered by the utility for use of

2.1.2.4 Electrical Liahtina Svstem Selection (Davliahtina).The W A C design engineer should assist in the evaluation ofdaylighting to ensure that electrical energy savings are notoffset by increased energy required by the WA C system due toincreased heating and cooling loads. Consider using LTGSTD 24, aDOE lighting prescriptive and system performance compliancecalculation program to assist the architect and electrical andmechanical engineer to evaluate the proposed facilitiescompliance with ASHRAE Standard 90.1, 10 CFR Part 435, EneravConservation Voluntarv Performance Standards for Commercial andMulti-Family Hiah Rise Residential Buildinas. Mandatory for NewFederal Buildinas and MIL-HDBK-1190 design energy targets.LTGSTD 24 is available on the CCB CD-ROM or from ASHRAE or DOE.

2 . 1 . 2 . 5 SDecial Enerav Conservation Features. There remains acontinuing need to achieve energy conservation on Navy buildingsby optimization of new building designs, accurate controlsystems, retrofit of older buildings, and incorporation ofspecial energy conservation features wherever appropriate (asjustified by life cycle cost).

a) Solar. Include active and passive solar systemsfor space heating, for heating pools, and for domestic hot wateronly if economically feasible. A new economic analysis need notbe performed if a previous study on a similar facility withsimilar weather conditions is available.

b) Heat Recovery Techniques. Refer to Appendix A foran exposition of some of the various techniques of heat recovery.

5



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 W 9999970 027L7Lb 125 IIMIL-HDBK-1003/3

Application of these techniques should only be considered whenrequired to meet the design energy budget and when operation andmaintenance are judged to be within the capability of localmaintenance personnel.

c) Thermal Storage. Due to the added complexity insystem operation and controls, only use thermal storage systemswhen required to meet the building energy budget and when provencost effective on a life cycle cost basis.

(1) Savings. Include demand charges, energycharges (energy cost may be lower when thermal storage is chargedoff peak), and savings in refrigeration equipment size reductionin the life cycle cost analysis. An electric rate structure witha high demand charge or with time-of-day metering rates providesthe best opportunity for savings on investment. Ensure that theanalysis includes the appropriate energy cost, e.g., billing for

electrical energy at a master meter vice the individual buildingmeter. If the station is master metered for consumers, additionof a single building may have no significant impact on the demandcharge, and additional energy used may be at the lowest availablerate. Other opportunities for savings include reduced cost forelectric service, increased efficiency of equipment operating atnight, and reduced cost for fire protection if water storage canbe integrated with thermal storage requirements.

(2) Equipment Selection. Packaged thermal storagesystems complete with controls are preferred over fieldfabricated systems.

2.2 EauiDment Selection

2.2.1 General. Determine the type of heating and coolingsystem to be used by the computer energy and life cycle costanalysis as described in MIL-HDBK-1190, Chapter 8. ApplicableNavy design manuals and guide specifications provide guidance onthe recommended classes of equipment to be evaluated for theparticular application and size range.

2.2.2 Heatins Ecniipment

2.2.2.1 Boiler Sizinq. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1003/6, CentralHeatins Plants and ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals for sizingboilers. Boiler sizing should consider:

a) Connected load, which includes the heating load,plus (where applicable) pipe loss and pickup, domestic hot water,process loads, and boiler plant auxiliaries.

6



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3 0 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273717 O b1 IIB

b) Boiler plant?s turndown ratio.

c) Provisions for future loads and standby foressential loads where applicable.

2 . 2 . 2 . 2 Boiler Fuel. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1003/6 for informationon how to select boiler fuel.life-cycle costs, and Federal and local emission standards.

Consider Navy criteria, fuel and

2 . 2 . 2 . 3 Auxiliary EauiDment. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1003/6 and Navyguide specifications for information on types and sizing ofauxiliary equipment.follows:

Some notes on plant equipment are as

a) Centrifugal Pumps. Check the system net positivesuction head (NPSH) as well as the pump NPSH in the design. Inthe past, engineers frequently specified non-overloading type

pumps. Today, pumping energy costs sometimes dictate other waysto arrange pump operating points. Do not oversize pumps. Referto the ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals and the Hydraulic Institutestandards for guidance on design of centrifugal pumping systems.

b) Non-Hermetic Motors. Refer to ASHRAE Handbook,Fundamentals; NFPA 70, National Electrical Code; and NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standards forguidance on selecting motors and motor protective devices.

c) Hermetic Motors. Hermetic motors are used inrefrigeration compressors, selected by the equipmentmanufacturer, and protected as required by NFPA 70.

d) Engine and Turbine Drives. Consult ASHRAEHandbook, Fundamentals and applicable NFPA standards for designguidance on the application of engines and turbines used to drivecompressors, fire pumps, power generators, and co-generationequipment.

2 . 2 . 2 . 4 Terminal EauiDment. Select and size terminal equipmentin accordance with ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals. Economic aswell as engineering considerations shall set the flow,

temperature, temperature drop, pressure, and pressure drop forcentral plant equipment; distribution piping and fittings; andterminal equipment parameters. if new terminal equipment isadded to an existing plant, ensure that the new system piping andvalves will not disturb the proper operation of existingdistribution system.

2.2.3 Coolins EauiDment

7



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-3003/3 m 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273738 T T 8 m

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

2.2.3.1 General. Select air cooled equipment on the basis ofentering air at 5 degrees F above the design temperature as givenin NAVFAC P-89 for roof mounted equipment and for equipment incorrosive environments.

2.2.3.2 Packaaed DX EcruiDment. Multiple packaged DX equipmentshould only be used when it is shown to be life cycle costeffective for the application.

2.2.3.3 Central Chilled Water Eauiprnent

a) Use only one chiller for comfort coolingapplications unless it becomes economical to split capacity.Mission requirements may dictate the use of multiple units withcapacities determined by critical loads. Obtain approval for theuse of multiple units from the engineering field division (EFD)or engineering field activity (EFA).

b) Size units on the basis of acceptable refrigerantsspecified in NAVFAC guide specification (NFGS)-15652, CentralRefriaeration EauiDment for Air Conditioninq. Do not userefrigerants with an ozone depletion potential (ODP) greater than0.05 or a global warming potential (GWP) greater than 0.34.

c) Use centrifugal or rotary screw compressor chillersfor capacities greater than 120 tons.

d) Though air cooled chillers are less efficient thanwater cooled chillers, air cooled chillers require less

maintenance; this should be a consideration in the selection.

e) Water treatment of cooling towers and evaporativecondensers should be carefully considered. Continuous bleedingor dumping of water treated with chemicals to the sanitary orstorm sewer may be prohibited. Check with the localenvironmental program manager for use of wastewater and sanitarysewer systems.

2.2.3.4 Auxiliarv EauiDment - Coolinq

a) Condenser Heat Rejection. Heat can be rejectedfrom a condensing refrigerant to atmosphere with an evaporativecondenser, with a water-cooled condenser and a cooling tower,with an air-cooled condenser, or with closed ground-loop waterrejection. Do not use potable water for condenser heatrejection. Provide a three-way diverter valve to controlcondenser cooling water supply temperature.stream, or lake water should only be considered after evaluatingenvironmental impact of returning heated water and additional

Cooling with pond,

8



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3 9999970 0273739 934

associated maintenance costs. Condenser heat can also berecovered for space heating including reheat and domestic waterheating.

b) Evaporative Condenser. An evaporative condenseryields high efficiency because of its low condensing temperature,and is smaller than an air-cooled condenser or cooling tower.Although the evaporative condenser is often mounted on the roof,it may be mounted inside the building and ducted to the outside.it requires less maintenance than a cooling tower because thewater treatment is easier.the fan, using a two speed fan and modulating dampers.sump piped to an inside reservoir in freezing climates.

Provide capacity control by cycling

Use a dry

c) Cooling Tower. A cooling tower also yields highefficiency with its low condensing temperature. It can bedesigned to give "free" cooling (e.g., cooling when the

refrigeration compressor motor is not running) with specialpiping or using a special refrigeration compressor.bleed off is required to prevent excessive concentration of

solids.control corrosion and scale, and to keep silt in suspension.Locate cooling towers to prevent short circuit of moist air; andso that drift from the tower will not water spot parked cars,large windowed areas, or sensitive architectural surfaces.Locate the condenser water pump below or alongside the towerbasin to ensure an adequate NPSH.sump and remote reservoir in freezing climates.control by cycling the fan.

Continuous

Chemical treatment is used to inhibit microorganisms,

Heat the basin or use a dryProvide capacity

d) Air Cooled Condenser. Because an air cooledcondenser is governed by the outdoor air dry bulb temperature, ithas higher condensing temperature and a lower energy efficiencythan an evaporative condenser or cooling tower installation.Maintenance costs and labor requirements are much lower with aircooled condensers than with cooling towers or evaporativecondensers.

e) Ground-Loop (Geothermal) Heat Rejection. Use wherejustified by life cycle cost evaluation and ecological

considerations and where space permits.welding plastic pipe provide long-lasting systems (25 years) withminimum maintenance requirements.

improved methods of

2.2.4 Ventilation Eauipment

9



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



2.2.4.1 General. Combine ventilation equipment for the heatingsystem with ventilation equipment for the cooling system whereverfeasible.air for IAQ at occupied operating modes.

Use positive methods to ensure adequate ventilation

2.2.4.2 Humid Climates. Independent ventilation systems arerequired in humid climates for humidity control. Refer toMIL-HDBK-1011/1, TroDical Enaineerinq.

2.2.4.3 Enaineered Smoke Control System. Use of smoke controlsystems should be limited to high rise structures such ashospitals. For detailed information on engineered smoke controlsystems, refer to ASHRAE Publication, Desian of Smoke ControlSystems for Buildinss, and ASHRAE Handbook, W A C Svstems andADDlications, and NFPA 92A, Smoke Control Svstems. Refer toAppendix B for notes on design of smoke control systems.

2.2.5 Humidification EauiDment

2.2.5.1 General. Provide humidification systems when outdoordesign conditions would result in an interior space relativehumidity less than 20 percent. Combine humidification equipmentwith W A C systems when central station air handling equipment isused. Ensure that the building can contain the added moisturewithout damage. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1191, Medical and DentalTreatment Facilities Desian and Construction for medicalfacilities requirements.

2.2.5.2 Steam Humidifiers. Use of direct steam containing

amines is prohibited. Provide moisture eliminators if heated panhumidifiers are used with high pressure steam as a heatingsource. Makeup water for pan humidifiers should be from a softwater source if available to minimize scaling.blowdown should be provided on heated pan humidifiers to reducescaling.

Automatic

2.2.5.3 Atomizina Humidifiers. Do not use atomizinghumidifiers as an alternative to direct steam or heated pan typesince these have the potential of injecting the legionnairebacillus as well as other pathogenic microorganisms into the air

distribution system.

2.2.6 Temperature Controls

2.2.6.1 General. Design control systems as simple as possible,reducing complexity to only that required to meet designconditions and to provide safe operation.safety controls as part of the system.additional general information on control systems.

Integrate limit andSection 8 provides

10



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~ ~ ~~~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 I 7 7 7 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 2 3 592 9

2.2.6.2 Direct Diaita1 Controls (DDC). Use direct digitalcontrols where justified by life cycle cost for new and majorreplacement WA C systems. Verify that activity operating andmaintenance personnel will use DDC by contacting the

EFD or EFA design manager or project leader.

2.2.6.3 Temperature Control Drawinas and Specifications.Comply with NFGS-15972, Direct Diaita1 Control Svstems orNFGS-15971, Space Temperature Control Svstems. Refer to par.4.1.5 for information required on drawings.

2.2.6.4 Automatic Control Valves. Use three-way mixing anddiverting valves only for two-position switching of water flowand three-way diverting valves for modulating control of coolingtower water. Use two-way modulating valves and variable flowpumping for other automatic control of water flow to achieveenergy efficient systems. Three-way valves provide inaccurate

control and at mid position tend to pass greater than designflow.

2.2.7 Enerav Monitorina and Control Svstem (EMCS) EMCS,which is also called Utility Monitoring and Control System(WCS), is not a unique system but is a special application of aDDC system. New buildings will provide energy managementfunctions by adding these programs to the DDC system. If anexisting EMCS is to be expanded, do so only when the EMCS is

proven functional and then comply with Army Technical Manual (TM)5-815-2, Enerav Monitorina and Control Svstems (EMCS), otherwisedesign a DDC system with energy monitoring functions.

provide terminal cabinets for a proposed EMCS.Do not

2.2.8 Instrumentation. Where instruments are required foradjustments only and are not essential for normal operation,

provide an arrangement to temporarily connect instruments withoutstopping or draining the system. Comply with Table 2.

2.2.8.1 Indicatina Instruments. Specify ranges of operationwhich give an indication of variation in operating conditions.Measuring instruments shall be provided near automatic controldevices, such as thermostats, humidistats, and pressure switches,

to facilitate adjustments and testing of the control device. Useindicating types only, unless a permanent operational record isdesired.

2.2.8.2 Recording Instruments. Provide recording instrumentsonly where a permanent record is required to analyze operatingcosts or effects on process applications.used, this function can be accomplished through softwareprograms.

If a DDC system is

11



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , ,

, ` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 m w q w o 273722 427 m

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Table 2

Typical Instrument Applications

INSTRUMENT

Thermometer

Thermometerwell only

Pressureindicator

Pressuretapping withgage cocks

Draft gages(not requiredwhere DDCsensors areconnected)

GENERALLOCATION

Pipeline

Ductwork

Pipeline

SPECIFIC LOCAT N

*Water chiller inlet and outlet.*Refrigerant condenser water inletand outlet.*Chilled and hot-water supply andreturn from branch mains.*Pipes from coils and heatexchangers.

*Outdoor air duct.*Return air duct.*After preheat coil, cooling coil,and heating coil.

*Individual cooling and heating coil

*Direct expansion coil refrigerant

*Refrigerant suction connection to

returns.

suction connection.

water chiller.

Equipment *Bearings of large compressors andmotors.

Pipeline *Before and after pressure reducing

"Suction and discharge of pumps andvalves.

compressors.

Equipment *Pressure lubrication system ofcompressors.

Equipment *Water entering and leaving sides ofcooling and heating coils, waterchillers, and refrigerant

condensers.Equipment *At static pressure regulators.

*Before and after large air filterbanks with a capacity above 4 , 0 0 0cubic feet per minute.

12



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 M 9999970 0273723 365 111

Table 2 (Continued)Typical Instrument Applications

INSTRUMENT GENERAL SPECIFIC LOCATIONLOCATION

Tappings for Equipment *Suction and discharge of fans.

draft gages *Induction unit risers.*Inlet side of mixing boxes.

Flow indicators Pipeline *Pump return for hot and chilledwater systems.

chilled water systems.*Each zone of multizone hot and

2.2.8.3 Combination Instrument and Controls. Recording andindicating instruments shall be combined with control devices tomeasure conditions at the point of control.

2 .2 .8 .4 Multi-Point Remote Indicators. Use multi-point remoteindicators to check temperature, pressure, humidity, and otherequipment operating conditions for areas remotely located fromthe central control point. With large installation, it can beadvantageous and economical to provide multi-point remoteindicators at a central supervisory location instead of havingseveral indicating type instruments installed at differentspaces.

2.2.8.5 Control Board. Instruments and controls in one spaceshall be combined on a single control board and arranged forrapid readout. Locate control boards for walk-up access.

2 . 2 . 8 . 6 Desired Instrumentation Characteristics

a) Range. The instrumentation range shall be suchthat under normal operating conditions, the indicating pointerwill remain vertical. Variations in operating conditions shalloccur within the middle one-third of the range.

b) Compensation. Specify self-compensatinginstruments which are not affected by external changes in

temperature or pressure.gages.

Provide surge protection for pressure

13



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



c) Over-Temperature Alarms. Include over-temperaturealarm signal system in electronic equipment facilities not having

continuous occupancy during operation. This system shall consistof at least one cooling-type thermostat in the electronicequipment room, and an audio alarm in the occupied controlcenter. For normal operations, set the thermostat to activatethe alarm when the facility temperature reaches 90 degrees F.Alarm circuit activation at lower temperatures can be used ifdictated by electronic equipment requirements.

d) Thermometers. Thermometer wells can be used inlieu of fixed permanent thermometers.locations for thermometers in piping systems.

Table 2 provides typical

e) Pressure Gages. Pressure gage tappings with cockscan be used in lieu of fixed, permanent pressure gages. Providepressure gages as indicated in Table 2.

2.2.9 Meterinq. Comply with NAVFAC Maintenance and OperationManual (MO)-209, Maintenance of Steam, Hot Water, and CommressedAir Distribution Svstems, MO-220, Maintenance and ODeration ofGas Svstems, and MO-230, Maintenance Manual Petroleum FuelFacilities. For Air Force projects, comply with Air ForceEngineering Technical Letter (ETL) 94-2, Utilitv Meters in Newand Renovated Facilities.consumption, verify proper system operation, and validate resultsof energy analysis and savings.

Meter new buildings to monitor energy

2.2.10 PiDina Svstems

2.2.10.1 Sizinq. Pipe sizing and maximum pipe velocities shallbe in conformance with ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals. Refer toSection 7 for additional information on design of piping systems.

2.2.10.2 Pipe Emansion. Preferred methods of accommodatingthermal expansion is by pipe geometry, e.g., offsets and changesin direction, and by pipe loops. Use expansion joints only whenspace does not permit proper geometry or installation of pipeloops.

2.2.11 Duct Svstem Desiun

2.2.11.1 W A C Svstems

a) Duct Sizing. ASHRAE Handbook, W A C Svstems andApplications offers three methods of sizing duct system; theequal friction method; the static regain method; and theT-method. The designer shall choose the method that he thinks ismost appropriate for the particular system, and then design

14



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` -

` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

according to ASHRAE Handbook, W A C Svstems and Amiications. Thestatic regain method should be used for sizing supply ducts in aVAV system (refer to Section 6 and Appendix C for additionalinformation).inches and minimum round duct size is 4 inches diameter. Roundduct is preferred because of reduced noise, pressure loss, andleakage. In general, try to size low velocity ducts in a rangeof .O5 to .O8 inch static pressure drop per 100 linear feet ofductwork. For large duct systems, the designer should iteratethe design by doing optimization to ensure lowest life cyclecost. Additional information on duct design is given in Section6 . For industrial ventilation duct design, refer toMIL-HDBK-1003/17, Industrial Ventilation Svstems.

Minimum rectangular duct size is 6 inches by 6

b) W A C Duct Construction. Duct construction shallfollow Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' NationalAssociation (SMACNA) standards. On drawings, note the SMACNA

pressure, seal, and leak classifications required. Inspecifications, note the duct tests required. See Figure 10 forpreferred method.

2.2.11.2 Restriction on Use of Ductwork. Do not use undergroundductwork because of health risks associated withsoil-incorporated termiticides such as chlordane and with soilscontaining radon gas. In addition, the following ductworkconstruction is prohibited:

a) Sub-slab or intra-slab HVAC system ducts.

b) Plenum type sub-floor W A C systems, as defined inthe Federal Housing Administration (FHA) minimum acceptableconstruction criteria guidance.

c) W A C ducts in contact with the ground within anenclosed crawl space.

d) Other HVAC systems where any part of the ducting isin contact with the ground.

2.2.12 Industrial Ventilation and Exhaust Svstems. For design

of industrial ventilation and exhaust systems, use the followingas appropriate: American Conference of Governmental IndustrialHygienists (ACGIH) Handbook, Industrial Ventilation - Manual ofRecommended Practice; and MIL-HDBK-1003/17, IndustrialVentilation Svstems. If the system conveys vapors, gases, orsmoke; use the equal friction or static regain method for design.If the system transports particulates, then velocities shall besufficient to transport the particles.

15



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - -

-



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

2 . 3 Noise and Vibration Control. For noise and vibrationcontrol, refer to Army TM 5-805-4, Noise and Vibration Controlfor Mechanical Ea-uiximent, Chief of Naval Operations Instruction(OPNAVINST) 5100.23, N a w Occuxiational Safetv and Health (NAVOSH)Proqram Manual, and ASHRAE Systems Handbook. Limit WA C andancillary equipment noise levels below those requiring a hearingconservation program as defined in Department of DefenseInstruction (DODINST) 6055.12, DOD Hearina Conservation Proaram.

2 . 4 Svstem and Eauiximent Performance. Refer toMIL-HDBK-1190, Facilitv Plannina and Desian Guide. For size andselection criteria of systems and equipment, refer to ASHRAEEquipment Handbook. W A C systems shall be able to dehumidifysupply air under loading conditions, provide reliable operations,and tolerate reasonable variations in chilled-water temperatures.Air conditioning systems generally operate at part loadconditions most of the time. This is particularly true of

comfort air conditioning systems which often operate at less than50 percent of their design load capacity for more than 50 percentof the time. Since high part load efficiencies are desirable toconserve energy, the selection of equipment and step starting andsequencing controls shall be made with an emphasis on reducinglife-cycle costs at part load conditions. Verify and documentthe equipment operation in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 1,Commissionina of WA C Svstems.

2 . 4 . 1 Coolina Svstems

2 . 4 . 1 . 1 Central Air Conditionina Svstems. Use these systems

for applications where several spaces with uniform loads will beserved by a single apparatus and where precision control of theenvironment is required. Cooling coils can be direct expansionor chilled water. Select air cooled or evaporative condensers,cooling towers, and ground-loop systems based on life cycleeconomics considering operating efficiencies and maintenancecosts associated with outdoor design conditions and environment,

e.g., high ambient temperatures and dusty conditions couldadversely impact the operation of air cooled condensers.Consider temperature rise of chilled water supply when selectingchilled water coils, especially for applications requiring

precision humidity control.

2 . 4 . 1 . 2 Unitarv Air Conditionina Svstems. These systems shouldgenerally be limited to loads less than 100 tons. Unitarysystems are packaged in self-contained or split configurations.Self-contained units incorporate components for cooling orcooling and heating in one apparatus. Thermostatic expansionvalves are preferred over capillary tubes and orifices forrefrigerant control when available as a manufacturer's option

1 6



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~~~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 9999 970 02737 27 T O O II

since expansion valves provide better superheat control over awide range of operating conditions. Split systems may includethe following configurations:

a) Direct expansion coil and supply fan combined witha remote compressor and condensing coil; or

b) Direct expansion coil, supply fan, and compressorcombined with a remote condenser, cooling tower, or ground-loopsystem.

These systems generally have lower first cost thancentral systems but may have higher life cycle costs.load operation is anticipated for a majority of equipmentoperating life, consider multiple unitary equipment for superioroperating efficiencies and added reliability.Handbook, Equipment for size and selection criteria.

If part

Refer to ASHRAE

2.4.1.3 Room Air Conditionins Units. These units areself-contained units serving only one space. These units aretypically referred to as window or through-the-wall type airconditioners.

W A C unit to provide ventilation air for a group of rooms. Usethem when they are life cycle cost effective, and in accordancewith MIL-HDBK-1190.

Rooms served by these units should have a separate

Refer to ASHRAE Equipment Handbook.

2.4.1.4 Built-UD Systems. These systems consist of individualcomponents assembled at the building site. Generally, use themwhen a large volume of air is handled.

as remote air handling systems with a central cooling plant.They are generally more efficient and better constructed thanunitary air handling units.units by an economic division of the load, considering: (a) thevalue of space occupied by equipment; (b) the extent of ductworkand piping; (c) the multiplicity of control, maintenance, andoperating points; and (d) energy conservation factors.

These systems may be used

Determine the number of air handling

2.4.2 Heatina Svstems. Heating sources can be either steam,hot water, natural gas, oil, electricity, or a renewableresource. Select these sources based on life cycle cost.

Heating systems may be combined with ventilating systems whenfeasible.at windows in office spaces.

Heating-dominated climates require perimeter radiation

2.4.2.1 Individual Heatins Plants. Locate individual heatingplants in the building they serve or in a separate, adjoiningbuilding.

17



--`,,,,,`,````̀ ,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,̀ ,`,,`---



MI L - HDBK- 1 0 0 3 / 3 rn 9999970 0271728 947 m

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

2.4 .2 .2 Central Heatina Plants. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1003/6.Base the total heating system capacity on normal demand ratherthan total connected load.

2.4.2.3 Snow Meltins Svstems. Provide snow melting systems tomaintain an access area free of snow and ice for such areas ashospital entrances and hangar doors.

2.4.3 All-Air Svstems. Refer to ASHRAE Systems Handbook. Inhumid climates, provide all-air systems for air conditioning.These systems are central systems which provide complete sensibleand latent heating and cooling of the air supply.are either single path or dual path. Single-path systems haveheating and cooling elements in a series configuration. Dual-path system elements are arranged in parallel. Consolidation ofsystem components at a central location provides increasedopportunity for energy conservation.

These systems

2.4.3.1 Constant-Volume Svstems. Use where room conditions areto be maintained by supplying a constant volume of air to thespace and varying supply air temperature in response to demandsfor net space heating or cooling.

a) Applications. In addition to multi-zone systems,this includes single-zone or single-space applications inauditoriums, meeting rooms, cafeterias, restaurants, and smallretail stores.

b) Multi-zone Systems. Use these systems to provide

individual temperature control of a small number of zones,maximum 10 zones, from a central air handler. For normal comfortcooling applications, place cooling and heating coils in the airhandler. For applications where humidity control is critical,place coils in series so that air is conditioned by the coolingcoil prior to passing to the hot deck.direct-expansion or chilled-water coils.steam coils, hot water coils, or electric coils.

Provide cooling byProvide heating by

c) Terminal Reheat Systems. These systems overcomezoning limitations by adding individual heating coils in each

zone's branch duct to compensate for areas of unequal heatingload. Heat, whether in the form of hot water, steam, orelectrical resistance heaters, is applied to eitherpreconditioned primary air or recirculated room air.

(1) These systems waste energy because supply airis cooled to a low enough temperature to serve the zone needingthe coolest air, but then supply air must be reheated for otherzones to avoid overcooling. Where constant volume is maintained,

18



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



the waste of energy can be even more significant.deck temperature to meet cooling requirements of the room withthe largest load or to satisfy humidity requirements. This colddeck temperature control reduces energy consumption.

Reset cold

(2) Due to high energy consumption, limit thesesystems to applications requiring close control of temperatureand humidity, such as hospital intensive care areas andlaboratories. when economically feasible, use heat recoveredfrom the refrigeration cycle in heating coils.

2.4.3.2 Variable Air Volume (VAV) Svstems. Use VAV systems forbuildings with sufficient zones (11 or more zones) and loadvariation to permit reduction of fan capacity for significant

periods during the day.complexity of systems should be consistent with minimumrequirements to adequately maintain space conditions. For more

information, refer to Section 6 and Appendix C.

Do not use bypass VAV systems. The

2.4.3.3 Economizer Cvcle. Obtain approval of the EFD or EFAfor use of the economizer cycle. The economizer cycle should notbe used in humid climates and for spaces where humidity controlis critical, such as computer rooms. Problems have beenexperienced with linkage corrosion, excessive damper leakage,jammed linkage on large dampers, and inadequate maintenance.

Outdoor air dampers should be located away from the intake louverand after duct transition to minimize exposure to weather andsize of dampers. Provide outdoor air dry bulb changeover ratherthan enthalpy or outdoor air/return air comparator changeover.

Pars. 6 . 3 , 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5 provide additional informationon the economizer cycle.

With VAV systems, return or relief fans shall not beAn economizer should only be used when it can be designed

Size gravityused.with gravity relief through the building envelope.relief dampers to prevent building over pressurization. Refer toSection 6 and Appendix C for additional information.

2.4.4 Duct, PiDe, and EuuiDment Insulation

a) Refer to NFGS-15250, Mechanical Insulation forguidance on design and selection of insulation systems.

b) Refer to MIL-HDBK-1011/1 for special requirementsin humid climates.

2.4.5 Computer Proarams for Load Calculation. For inputcharacteristics of computer programs, refer to MIL-HDBK-1190.Use ASHRAE procedures, hourly weather data or bin method, and

19



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~ ~~

M IL-HDBK-LOfl3 /3 99 99 97 0 02 73 73 0 5 T 5 I!MIL-HDBK-1003/3

part load equipment performance data.load equipment and system performance in the load calculation.The following computer programs may be helpful in loadcalculation:

Demonstrate full and part

a)The BLAST computer program is used to predict energyBuilding Loads Analysis and System Thermodynamics

(BLAST).consumption, energy system performance, and energy cost inbuildings. This program computes hourly space loads, mechanicaland electrical power consumption, power plant fuel consumption,and life-cycle costs. This program may be obtained by contactingBLAST Support Office, Department of Mechanical Engineering,University of Illinois, 1206 West Green Street, Urbana, IL 61801;telephone 1-800-UI-BLAST. This program is funded by the U.S.Army Corps of Engineers. If used by Federal agencies, thisprogram is free of charge.

b) Commercial Programs. Computer programs for W A Cand dehumidifying systems are commonly available from computersoftware companies or air conditioning manufacturers.

2.5 Mechanical Room Ventilation. Provide ventilationsystems for mechanical equipment rooms to limit temperature risedue to heat release from piping and equipment. Size fans basedon a 10 degree temperature rise above the outdoor dry bulbtemperature design condition; provide thermostat control of fans.Design ventilation systems for equipment rooms containingrefrigeration equipment in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15,Safetv Code for Mechanical Refriqeration including refrigerant or

oxygen deprivation sensors (based on the classification ofrefrigerant) and alarms, to ensure safe refrigerant concentrationlevels. Pipe refrigerant discharges from pressure reliefdevices, rupture members, fusible plugs, and purge units directlyto the exterior of the building.

2.5.1 Self-contained Breathina Amaratus (SCBAI. Do notprovide SCBA for mechanical refrigeration rooms, unless therewill be a full time standing watch in the room. Provide, andmaintain current, SCBA training for watchstanders, where there isa full time standing watch.

a) The fire department or hazardous material spillresponse team answering an alarm call will have SCBA available.If they need assistance in securing any equipment, they will beable to outfit the refrigeration mechanic with SCBA and providetrained escorts to accompany the refrigeration mechanic into thehazardous atmosphere.

20



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,`

` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MI L - HDBK- 1 0 0 3 / 3 = 9999970 0271;733 L i31 =MIL-HDBK-1003/3

b) It is too dangerous to allow untrained personnel todon SCBA equipment and venture into a known hazardous atmosphere.For that reason, the Navy has elected not to provide the SCBA,since there would be no control over who might don the SCBA andattempt to enter the room.

2.6 Radon Miticration Svstems. The following components ofa sub-slab depressurization system should be included in thedesign for buildings which will be constructed on sites known orsuspected of being a source of radon gas and which will beoccupied more than 4 hours a day:

a) Piping. Provide one 3-inch diameter polyvinylchloride (PVC) pipe (Schedule 20) through the floor slab forevery 1,000 square feet of slab area located as close to thecenter of the area as possible. See Figure 1 for floorpenetration detail. Pipe should extend through the building

roof, concealed in partitions, closets, store rooms, etc. Anadequate length of straight vertical piping should be provided inthe ceiling space below the roof for future installation of thedepressurization fan if post construction testing indicatesexcessive radon levels. Locating the fan near the roof orceiling establishes a negative pressure in the piping systemthereby minimizing potential of leaks in occupied spaces. Crackbetween pipe and slab should be sealed with polyurethane caulk.Evaluate the economic feasibility of combining several PVC pipesto reduce the number of risers and the number of roofpenetrations, especially for multi-story buildings.

b) Electrical Requirements. Provide a 110 volt, 15ampere electrical power supply terminating at convenientlocations near the location for the future depressurization fansin PVC pipe. Ensure convenient access to locations selected forfuture installation of depressurization fans.

21



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` --

-



MIL-HDBK-1003/3 7 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273732 378 W

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

POLYURETHANE C A U X

7V b .

4ff P A

d

f d

3-INc11 DU. PVC/- UCTION PIPE

c

P 4 r

.

IA. PVC TEE -MESH GALVANIZEDSCREE#

Figure 1Floor Penetration for Sub-Slab Depressurization System

22



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 R 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 1 7 3 3 204 .I

Section 3 : APPLICATIONS

3.1 General. Criteria applicable to specific buildingtypes are listed in Table 3.

requirements are not addressed in this handbook.These criteria apply when specific

3.2 Buildina Twes. MIL-HDBK-1190 is the highest rankingNavy design criteria, followed by NAVFAC design manuals andNAVFAC military handbooks. Refer to the EFD or EFA A-E Guide for(local) submission requirements. Refer to ASHRAE handbooks fordesign guidance not shown in Navy criteria.

3.3 Air Force Projects. Air Force criteria shall governwhen different from Navy criteria.

3.4 Tropical Enaineerinq. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1011/1 foradditional design guidance. Some of the problems encountered

with WA C systems in the tropics are:

a) Corrosion of equipment.

b) Damage by windblown debris and windblown rain.

c) Humidity control. Comfort cooling systems requirecooling of outside air the year around to control humidity.

d) Special pipe insulation and vapor barriers.

e) Damper mechanisms tend to jamb due to corrosion.

3 . 5 Electronic Facilities. Building types include:

a) Receiver buildings

b) Telephone and switchgear rooms

c) Radio direction-finder facilities

d) Uninterrupted power supply (UPS) rooms

e) Transmitter buildings

f) Computer rooms

g) Control towers

h) Transportable/tactical facilities

I) Transportable/relocatable facilities

23



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003 /3 m wo 0273734 140 m

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

j ) Permanent facilities

k) Transportable, non-relocatable facilities

Table 3Applicable Criteria by Building Type

Building Category Navy Other Guides/ SpecialCodes Criteria Standards Considerations

(All) (Varies) MILHDBK-1190,NAVFAC P-89,& MILHDBKs

USAF (variProjects

A-E Guide

OSHA 1910

A-E ContractPED (DD-1391)

Local StationSmoking Regs

s ) Current US-/

LEEE, ETLs,AFMs, USAF

RegionalCivil EngineerGeneral Design& ConstructionGuidance MILCONProgram

Plus NavyCriteria

Tropical (Varies) MILHDBK-1011/1Engineering

Clean (Varies) MILHDBK-1028/5Rooms

ASHRAE H ã b k See 3 . 2Series

NFPA Codes

Local &

RegionalBldg Codes

(Varies) See 3.3

See , . 4

See NavyCriteria

24



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~ ~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 9999970 0273735 087 W

' Air 141-11Pass ngerTerminal

Table 3 (Continued)Applicable Criteria by Building Type

Building Category

Type Codes

High (Var sAltitudeElectro-MagneticPulseProtectionfor Ground-BasedFacilities

Electronic (Varies)

Computer (varies)Roomsin ElectronicFacilities

Satellite 131CommunicationGround Station(this is anelectronic

facility

Navigation 133& Traffic 137Aids

Airfield 136Lighting

USMC 141CryogenicsFaci i y

Other Guides/ Speciala wCriteria Standards Considerations

MILHDBK-423

MILHDBK-IOI2/1

MILHDBK-1012/1

MILHDBK-1012/1

MIL-STD-210

NAVELEX 0101,

105

NAVAIR 51-5OAAA-2

NAVFAC P-272

NAVFAC P-272

See NavyCriteria

See 3 . 5

See NavyCriteria

See NavyCriteria

See NavyCriteria

See NavyCriteria

See NavyCriteria

See NavyCriteria

25



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003 /3 H 9999970 0 2 7 L 7 3 b T L 3 H


Building Category

Type CodesNavy Other Guides/ SpecialCriteria Standards Considerations

Air Cargo 141-12Terminal

Courier 141-13Station

Aircraft 141-20Fire &

RescueStation &

Structural/AircraftFire &

RescueStation

Aircraft 141-30LineOperationsBldg

Aircraft 141-40

OperationsBldg

Photo- 141-60graphicBldg

Fleet 141-65Reconnais-sance Photo-graphic Lab

NAS 141-70Control Twr(this is anelectronicfacility)

NAVFAC P-272 See 3.6

TM 5-844NAVFAC P-360

MILHDBK-1008BMILHDBK-1028/1MILHDBK-1028/6

See NavyCriteria

See NavyCriteria

NAVFAC P-272 See 3 . 7

NAVFAC P-272

NAVFAC P-272

NAVFAC P-272

NAVELEX 0101,107

NAVFAC P-272

See Navy

Criteria

See 3.8

See NavyCriteria

See 3.9

26



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,̀ ,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~

M IL-H DB K-3003/3 ï ï ï ï ï 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 37 ï 5 T M

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


Building Category

m e Codes

Liquid 141-873xygenlNitrogenFacilities

Helium 142-10Plant & 142-19Storage

Armory for 143-45Fleet MarineForce (FMF)Air GroupSquadron

Explosive 148-20OrdnanceDisposal(EOD) TeamFacilities

Aircraft 149

Fixed PointutilitySystems

Mainte- 200nance Faci-lities forAmmunitionExplosives& Toxics

General 210

MaintenanceFacilities

Navy Other Guides/ SpecialCriteria Standards Considerations

NAVFAC P-272 See 3.10

MILHDBK-1024/3

MILHDBK-1024/2

29 CFR 1910.94

NAVFAC P-272

NAVFAC P-272

MILHDBK-1028/6

MILHDBK-1028/3

NAVSEA OP 3368& NAVSEA OP 5

DM-28.4

See NavyCriteria

See Navy

Criteria

See NavyCriteria

See Navy

Cri eria

See 3.11

ACGIH Indus- See 3.12

trial Venti-lation -

Manual ofRecommendedPractice

NFPA 33

27



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,̀ ,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~~ ~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 = 9 9 9 9 7 7 0 0271738 8îb =


Building Category Navy Other Guides/ Special

Type Codes Criteria Standards Considerations

Aircraft 211 MILHDBK-1028/1MaintenanceFacilities

See NavyCriteria

Shipyard 213 MILHDBK-1028/5 ACGIH Indus- See NavyMaintenance trial Venti- CriteriaFacilities DM-28.4 lation -

Manual ofRecommended

OSHA Practice

Hospital 500-550 MILHDBK-1191 NFPA codes See 3.13Dental & includingMedical NFPA 101Facilities

JCAH Stds

ASHRAE Hdbks

Admin 610 MILHDBK-1034Facilities

Family 710 MILHDBK-1035Housing

FHA MinimumProperty Std

Bachelor 721 MILHDBK- 3EnlistedQuarters

Bachelor 724 MILHDBK-1036Officer

Quarters

Swimming 740-53 DM-37.1Pool

See NavyCriteria

See 3.14

See 3.15

See 3.16

See NavyCriteria

28



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

N I L - H D B K - L O O 3 / 3 M 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273739 7 2 2 I

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


Building Category Navy Other Guides/ Special

Type Codes Criteria Standards Considerations

Industrial (None) MILHDBK-1003/17Ventilation

Energy (None) MILHDBK-1190Conservation

KitchenVentilation

See 3.17

See NavyCriteria

See 3.18

I Laundry See 3.19

i)

m) Emergency generator rooms

n) Satellite communication ground stations

o) Shielded enclosures

p ) Automated data processing (ADP) centers

q) Oceanographic facilities

UPS and microwave equipment battery rooms

3.6 Air Carcro Terminal. Provide climate control in officesand computer room.equipment as required.

Provide for chilled water cooling of

3.7 Aircraft Line ODerations Buildinq. When heating isrequired for movable structures, provide small oil-fired roomheaters bearing the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.(UL) where required.economical alternative.

Electric heat may be considered as a more

3.8 PhotoaraDhic Buildinq. Ensure that ventilationprovided in the color film processing room is adequate to removeheat and fumes from equipment. Fresh air intake and interiorreturn vents shall be filtered and ventilation shall produceminimum air movement (approximately 15 feet per minute) toprevent agitation of settled dust. Design exhaust ventilation

29



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~ ~

MI L - HDBK- 1 0 0 3 / 3 I 979970 OS71740 444 6

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

system for chemical mixing room to maintain air in the breathingzone free of chemicals. (Refer to Section 2 of MIL-HDBK-1003/17for recommended design procedures.) The exhaust fan and ventingof automatic processing equipment shall not re-introduce exhaustfumes into the fresh air intake.

3.9 Naval Air Station Control Tower. Remote transmittersand receivers associated with towers usually require airconditioning.provide a central alarm system for out-of-service conditions suchas high temperature.shall be provided for the control cab for personnel comfort and

for electronic equipment rooms to meet temperature and humidityrequirements of electronic equipment.analysis of the solar heat gain to ensure proper sizing of thecooling equipment. Provide for manual adjustment of thermostatsto control air conditioning by control cab occupants. Provide

for emergency ventilation for the control cab utilizing the airconditioning supply duct.

3.10 Liaid Oxvaen and Nitrouen Facilities. Designventilation systems to provide personnel comfort and adequateremoval of fugitive gas emissions.

If remote buildings are associated with towers,

Forced ventilation or air conditioning

Conduct a thorough

3.11Toxics.

3.12include

Maintenance Facilities for Ammunition, Emlosives. andThese facilities include:

a) General ammunition maintenance shops

b) Bomb-type ammunition maintenance shops

c) Propellant powder maintenance shops

d) Air and underwater weapons shops

e) Quality evaluation laboratory

General Maintenance Facilities. Building types

a) Motorized vehicle maintenance

b) Transportation refueled repair

c)

d) Railroad equipment

e) Marine Corps motor vehicle maintenance

Construction and weight handling equipment

30



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

N I L - H D B K - I I O ~ ~ / ~ = 9999970 0271741 380 9

Weapons maintenance

Electronic and communication maintenance

Container repair and test

NFESC Drum reconditioning

Mechanical equipment calibration

Aircraft ground support equipment

Ground support equipment holding

Battery shop

Public works maintenance

Refer to 29 CFR 1910.94, -106, .107, and .lo8 for ventilationrequirements related to specific operations, e.g., abrasiveblasting, painting, buffing and grinding, dip tanks, and chemicalstorage.

3.13 Homital, Dental, and Medical Facilities. MilitaryStandard (MIL-STD)-1691, Construction and Material Schedule forMilitam Medical and Dental Facilities provides utilityrequirements for medical equipment to assist in determining heatgains, ventilation requirements (e-g., ume hood exhaust), andsteam connections (e.g., sterilizers).

3.14 Familv Housinq. Provide access for maintenance ofmechanical equipment and devices. For safety, protect mechanicalspaces and equipment with strong door catches or shielding frommoving parts and controls. Provide ducted exhaust fans withbackdraft dampers for kitchens and interior bathrooms. Sizebathroom fans for 10 air changes per hour minimum; kitchenexhaust fans for 15 air changes per hour minimum or 50 cubic feetper minute per linear foot of range hood.MIL-HDBK-1035, Family Housinq for requirements on attic exhaustfans, evaporative cooling, and air conditioning.

Refer to

3.15 Bachelor Enlisted Ouarters. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1036,Bachelor Ouarters for procedures to calculate heating and coolingloads, equipment sizing, and design recommendations; except thatventilation requirements shall be in accordance with ASHRAEStandard 62.

31



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-3003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 4 2 217 H

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

3.16 Bachelor Officer Ouarters. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1036 forprocedures to calculate heating and cooling loads, equipment

sizing, and design recommendations; except that ventilationrequirements shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.

3.17 Industrial Ventilation. The scope of this handbook islimited to WA C systems.Industrial Ventilation - Manual of Recommended Practice. Design

for sufficient makeup air for buildings with industrialventilation exhaust systems to limit building negative pressureto 0.05-inch water gage. introduce air into spaces with exhaust

hoods at low velocities to prevent interference with hoodperformance. Treat air exhausted outdoors to conform with localand Federal emission standards.

Refer to MIL-HDBK 1003/17 and ACGIH

3.18 Kitchen Ventilation. Outdoor air supplied to thedining area shall be used as kitchen makeup air.

exhaust air volume exceeds dining area outdoor air requirements,additional air shall be supplied directly into the kitchen.Outdoor air supplied directly to the kitchen shall be filtered

and heated, and introduced horizontally at or near the ceiling toprovide mixing without directly causing drafts at cooking levelsor on kitchen personnel. The minimum ventilation rate fornon-air conditioned kitchens is 30 air changes per hour intemperate zones.60 air changes per hour.hoods is considered part of the kitchen ventilation system.

If kitchen

The minimum in the tropics or semi-tropics isAir exhausted through range and kettle

Refer to MIL-HDBK-1190 for guidance in the application

of air conditioning.season to air conditioned kitchens shall be limited to volumerequired by various hoods. In air conditioned kitchens, designthe supply system so that hoods exhaust primarily unconditionedair and recirculation of kitchen odors is minimized. Also,

evaluate the feasibility of evaporative cooling in lieu of airconditioning. In non-air conditioned kitchens, design the supply

system for cross ventilation.

Air volume supplied during the heating

3.18.1 Kitchen Eauirsment Exhaust Hoods. Provide grilles,ovens, ranges, kettles, and dishwashers with exhaust hoods, and ameans for precipitating and disposing of grease where applicable.

Hoods shall be capable of extracting grease using centrifugalforce. Exhaust systems shall conform to NFPA 96, VentilationControl and Fire Protection of Commercial Cookina ODerations.

3.18.2 Exhaust Svstems. Fan motors for exhaust systems inkitchen, dining, and related areas shall be located out of theair stream. Do not locate volume dampers or splitters betweenthe hood and fan. Duct velocity shall range between 1500 and

32


Not for Resale, 10/08/2010 09:05:03 MDTproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS

- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 î ï î ï î 7 0 0271743 153 E

1700 feet per minute to maintain particulate matter insuspension.dismantling.

Provide accesses for cleaning ducts without

3.18.3 Fire Protection. Refer to MIL-HDBK-l008B, FireProtection for Facilities Enaineerina, Desian, and Construction.Ranges, ovens, broilers, deep-fat fryers and other appliancesthat present fire hazards shall have exhaust hoods, ducts, andfans. Install high-limit thermostats in exhaust ducts as near aspossible to the hood to protect the hood exhaust system fromgrease fires. For more information, refer to ASHRAE Handbook.Exhaust fans for hoods with dry chemical extinguishing systemsshall remain on when the extinguishing system is activated.Similarly, exhaust hood and ductwork dampers shall remain openwhen the extinguishing system is activated.extinguishing systems, the fan shall be turned off.

For other types of

An easily accessible, independent and well identifiedmanual switch shall be provided for the fire extinguishing systemof each hood. Do not install volume control dampers in range andkitchen hood exhaust ductwork, but provide a fire damper in theoutlet, except in ductwork with extinguishing systems. Inaddition, provide an automatic hood cleaning system.

3.18.4 Calculation of Exhaust Hood Air Volume Rate. Tocalculate actual exhaust rate required for kitchen equipmentexhaust hoods, apply the following procedure:

a) Determine, for each item of kitchen equipment, the

equipment type, fuel type, and ventilator type; and determine theequipment width, depth, and surface area, including work tablesfrom the kitchen equipment plan requirements.

b)from Table 4 for each piece of equipment.

Select the appropriate thermal current velocity

c) Select the appropriate safety factor from Table 5for each item of equipment.

d) Calculate the duty group cfm per foot of width for

each item of equipment by multiplying the equipment area timesthe thermal current velocity times the safety factor, and dividethe result by the equipment width.

e) Classify each item of equipment into its duty groupin accordance with Table 6, and assign the appropriate standardair volume rate for each item of equipment.

33



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` `

` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



f ) Calculate the total kitchen exhaust airflow foreach item or equipment by multiplying each assigned standard airvolume rate times the width of its respective item of equipment.

g ) Add the total exhaust airflow for each item of

equipment located beneath an individual kitchen hood, todetermine the hood required airflow quantity.

Provide a table of calculations for the kitchen equipment exhausthoods in the design calculations; include the data andcalculations from the above subparagraphs a) through 9).

Table 4Thermal Currents Charts

Equipment Approximate Thermal Current Velocity

Surface (Feet Per Minute)Temperature(Degrees F)

GASLECTRICITY

Dishwashers, Ovens,

Steamers, and Kettles 210 20 25

Braising and Pans 150 30 50

Chicken Broaster 350 35 55

Fryers 375 35 60

Griddles and Ranges 375 35 40

800 85 100I Hot Top RangesSalamanders, High 350Broilers

IGrooved Griddles 500-600

6 0 7 0

65 75

Charbroilers 600-750 75 175

2 0 0roilers (Live Charcoal) 1500 - -

Work Tops, Spreaders, - -

etc.5 5

34



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



Table 5Safety Factor Chart

Ventilator Type Multipliers

Backshel 1 .05

Pas over 1 . 1 5

General All-Purpose

Wall Mount: End Closed 1 . 0 5End Open 1.20

Island Style: SingleDouble

1.501.30

Table 6Duty Group Chart

Group Range Standard Air Volume(cfm/ft) (cfm/

Light Duty O to 150 15 0

Standard Duty 1 5 1 to 250 250

Heavy Duty 2 5 1 to 300

Extra Heavy Duty 301 to 400

3 0 0

400

3.18.5 Exhaust Hood Heat Recoverv. Heat recovery for kitchenexhaust hoods should only be considered for commercial sizekitchen when life cycle cost effective and when building designcannot meet the energy budget. Manufactured heat recoverymodules for commercial size kitchen hoods are available. Thesemodules typically use a heat pipe method of heat recovery, butseveral configurations are available. Also, heat exchangerequipment should be located at ground level for easy access toinspect, maintain, and remove for shop cleaning. The keyvariable for heat recovery feasibility is hours of operation.intermittently used exhaust may not have sufficient operatinghours for heat recovery to be cost effective.

An

35



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` `

` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

NIL-HDBK-3003/3 9 9 9 5 9 7 0 O273746 962 9

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

3.18.6 Air Curtains. Air curtains designed as fly screensshall be provided on exterior entrances to food preparationareas, but they shall not be required if the entrance is to beused only as an emergency exit. When air curtains are mounted in

locations significantly above normal door heights, curtain airvelocities and noise levels shall be verified by the designer.Evaluate the feasibility of using air curtains for conditionedarea openings to loading docks or similar service areas. Formore information, refer to ASHRAE Handbook series.

3.19 Laundries

a) Due to high heat releases from processingequipment, laundries generally do not require space heatingsystems where minimum ambient winter temperature is above 50degrees F. For lower ambient temperatures, provide unit heatersto maintain space temperatures above 40 degrees F during

unoccupied periods. Unit heaters can be direct fuel fired(vented) type or steam or hot water coil type.

b) Ventilation cooling is generally required yeararound during occupied periods. Provide 30 air changes per hourfor temperate zones and 60 air changes per hour in tropic andsemi-tropic zones. For winter design temperatures below 50degrees F, ventilation air should be tempered. If life cyclecost effective, heat recovery from exhaust air is the preferredmethod of tempering makeup air using one of the systemsillustrated in Figures A-4 through A - 8 .of tempering include direct fired duct heaters and steam or hot

water coils with full flow through the coils and face and bypassdampers for temperature control. Provide a low limit thermostatin the discharge from the coil to stop the fan for freezeprotection.

Other acceptable methods

c) Spot cooling can be provided for fixed stationssuch as ironers, presses, and mangles. Evaporative cooling canbe an effective means of cooling air in most geographic areas.Consider supplying air at the operator's feet with airdistribution below a raised platform; provide individual operatorcontrol of air supply.

36



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` `

` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273747 8TeI

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

d) Provide clothes dryer vents independent of otherexhaust systems.more than 200 cubic feet per minute. If the exhaust duct exceedsthe manufacturer's recommended length, provide a fan sized formaximum cubic feet per minute of dryer(s). Specify galvanized

steel or aluminum exhaust ducts without fasteners that could traplint. Limit duct velocity to 2000 feet per minute. Calculatefan static pressure from the point of the most distant ventconnection to the exhaust duct to the exhaust air discharge.Provide access in the duct for cleanout every 10 feet and at the

bottom of vertical risers.bird or insect screen at the exhaust air discharge.fan out of the exhaust air stream. Interlock the exhaust fan(and makeup air system if provided) to operate when any dryer

operates.

Include a makeup system for systems exhausting

Provide a backdraft damper withoutLocate the

37



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 W 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273748 735IMIL-HDBK-1003/3

Section 4: INFORMATION REQUIRED ON DRAWINGS

4.1 General. Drawings shall provide a clear presentationof system design, and shall include items noted in projectspecifications by such terms as "where indicated," "as shown,"

etc. Refer to the local A/E Guide for additional requirements.Provide complete details of equipment, systems, and controls onproject drawings as follows:

4.1.1 Identification of Drawinss. Ensure that the drawingslist, sheet numbers, and sheet titles on mechanical sheets matchexactly as shown on the cover sheet and in specifications.

4.1.2 EauiDment Schedules. Provide schedules of mechanicalequipment.

4.1.3 Duct Pressure Classifications. Include duct pressure

classifications on drawings to ensure ducts meet SMACNAconstruction standards. Evaluate the effect of closed firedampers on duct pressure when determining pressureclassification; include pressure relief devices as required tolimit pressure buildup. See Figure 10 for examples or followSMACNA

4.1.4 Riser Diasrams. Riser diagrams drawn to vertical scaleshould be provided for mechanical systems in multi-storybuildings. These shall indicate size changes in vertical pipingruns. See Figures 38 and 39 for examples.

4.1.5 Controls. Include schematics (control loops) andladder diagrams (see Figures 33, 34, and 35 for examples),sequences of operation, and equipment schedules (see Tables 15,16, and 17 for examples). Include the following information tothe maximum extent possible without being proprietary:

a) The schematic should show control loop devices andpermanent indicating instrumentation, including spare thermometerwells.

b) Schematic and ladder diagrams should show interfacepoints between field installed W A C control systems, factory

installed W A C control systems (e.g., chiller and boilercontrols), fire alarm systems, smoke detection systems, etc.

c) The ladder diagram should show the relationship ofdevices within W A C equipment (e.g., agnetic starters) and othercontrol panels.

38



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~ ~~

~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 = 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 1 7 4 9 b?L

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

d) The equipment schedule should show information thatthe vendor needs to provide instrumentation with properlycalibrated ranges; to select proper control valves and associatedactuators; to adjust control system devices for sequencingoperations; to configure controller parameters, such as setpointsand schedules; and to set the control system time clocks.Indicate control valve flow coefficient (Cv) and pressure dropfor every control valve.

e) Locations of devices and instrumentation should beindicated. Provide space, access, lighting, and appropriatemounting heights to read the instrumentation and set controldevices.

f) Provide electrical surge protection on WA C controldevices as required to protect the DDC and EMCS.

g) Each control system shall have a sequence ofoperation.adjacent to the schematic. After a standard has been adopted byindustry, provide graphical schematics for sequence of operationof DDC systems on drawings.

The sequence of operation should be shown on drawings

h) Provide an input and output schedule for DDCsystems. Schedule shall include a description of the device,type of point, and any special requirements.

i) A commissioning procedure for temperature controlsshould be specified and should detail how the vendor will inspect

calibrate, adjust, commission, and fine tune each W A C controlsystem. Refer to par. 8.6.

j ) Project specifications should specify thecoordination of W A C system balancing with the temperaturecontrol system tuning. Specifications should require thatbalancing be completed, the minimum damper positions be set, andthe balancing report be issued before the control systems aretuned.

k) Project specifications should list submittal

requirements for the vendor.

4.1.6 Maintainabilitv. Lack of maintenance contributes topoor performance of most systems throughout the Navy's shorefacilities.

brought about by lack of design detail on drawings to ensure aninstallation with adequate accessibility for ease of operationand maintenance. Equally important are drawings that clearlyrepresent the intended system arrangement and describe system

This is due primarily to poor working conditions

39



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



operation.on drawings:

To preclude this in the future include the following

a) Identification of floor area required to removeequipment components such as filters, coils, heat exchangertubes, bearings, etc. In equipment rooms, require that floorspace be identified by striping with yellow paint.

b) Equipment elevations and room sections to clearlyidentify equipment arrangement which provides sufficient accessfor equipment operation and maintenance.

c) Location of permanent ladders, catwalks, andplatforms required to access and maintain overhead equipment.Minimize the use of elevated equipment wherever possible.

d) Use two dimensional pipe drawings (with dimensions

indicated as necessary) for congested spaces to ensure thatequipment and piping will be installed as intended with adequatepersonnel space available for operation and maintenance.

4.1.7 Symbols and Abbreviations

4.1.7.1 General. Provide a list of symbols and abbreviations

on the title sheet of the project. Use symbols and abbreviationsthat are common to the trade as contained in ASHRAE handbooks.For larger projects, each discipline may have their correspondinglists on the first sheet of their group of drawings.

4.1.7.2 SDecifics. Limit symbols and abbreviations to itemsthat are actually in the project. Limit abbreviations to itemsthat occur more than once in the project.

4.1.8 Buildina Column Lines and Room Names. Ensure thatbuilding column lines and room names are identical to those shownon architectural drawings.

40



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Section 5: LOAD CALCULATIONS

5.1 General. Refer to par. 2.1.1.2 for the selection ofoutdoor and indoor design conditions. Manual procedures providedbelow for determining heating and cooling loads are generallyonly applicable to small systems (e.g., heating systems less than200,000 Btu per hour and cooling systems less than 10 tons).Computer programs are available that will provide more preciseload determinations and the time of day with the highest coolingload.dawn; therefore, this should be considered in the design heatingload.

The highest heating load is assumed to occur just before

5.2 Heatins Load

5.2.1 Transmission

EQUATION: Q = U * A * (!ri T ~ ) 1)

where: Q = Btu/hr heat loss by transmission,

U = heat transfer coefficient (look this up in ahandbook for your particular wall, floor, roof, etc.),

A = area of the surface (wall, window, roof, etc.),

Ti = inside design temperature, and

To = outside design temperature.

Use this formula to compute heat transmission lossesfrom each element of the building skin (e.g., walls, windows,roof, etc.). Note that attic and crawl space and groundtemperature are different from outdoor temperatures.

5.2.2 Infiltration and Ventilation. To determine the heatingload use the larger of the infiltration and ventilation loads.Outdoor air provided for ventilation should exceed the airexhausted by 10 to 15 percent to minimize infiltration. Thedesigner must use judgment on the amount of excess supply air to

include based on number and type of windows and doors.

EQUATION: Q = 1.10 * CFM * (Ti - To) (2)

where: CFM = cubic feet per minute of outdoor air, and

Q = the sensible heat loss, Btu/hr.

41



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 5 2 L b b E

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

This section does not apply to industrial ventilationsystems, e.g., systems to control fumes, vapors, and dust fromsuch processes as plating, painting, welding, and woodworking.Refer to the MIL-HDBK-1003/17 and ASHRAE Handbook, W A C Svstemsand ADDlications, for guidance on design of these systems. The

EFD or EFA and the Naval Facilities Engineering Service Center(NFESC) can provide additional assistance.

5.2.3 Total Heatina Load. Sum the transmission loads withinfiltration and ventilation loads to get the total heating load.To this computed total heating load, add the following to sizecentral equipment (do not apply these factors when sizingterminal equipment such a finned-tube radiation, fan-coil units,etc.):

a) Exposure factor (prevailing wind side) up to 15

percent.

b) Pickup (for intermittently heated buildings withprimary heat sources such as boilers, steam-to-water heatexchangers, etc.) 10 percent.

c) Buildings with night setback. A residence with 10degrees F setback requires 30 percent oversizing for acceptancepickup and minimum energy requirements.

5 .3 Coolina Load. Computation of the peak cooling load canbe a difficult effort. Heat gain is composed of or influenced bythe conduction heat gain through opaque portions of the buildingskin; the conduction plus solar radiation through windows andskylights; the building internal loads such as people, lights,equipment, motors, appliances, and devices; and outdoor air loadfrom infiltration. For sizing VAV systems, calculation of loadshas more stringent requirements. Refer to Appendix C .

5.3.1 Transmission

5.3.1.1 Walls and Roof

EQUATION: Q = U * A * (To - Ti) (3)

Refer to par. 5 . 2 . 1 for definition of terms.

5.3.1.2 Glass

a) Transmission

EQUATION: Q = U * A * (To - T ~ ) (4)

42



--` , , , , ,

` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



"MIL -HDBK-L003 /3 ai 9 9 9 3 9 7 0 0273753 O T 2 II

b) Solar Heat Gain

where: SC = shading coefficient, and

SHGF = solar heat gain factor (look up the SHGF in ahandbook (e.g., SHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals) for each exposureand type of glass).

5.3.2 infiltration and Ventilation

a) Sensible

EQUATION: Q, = 1.10 * CFM * (To - Ti) (5)

b) Latent

EQUATION: QL = 4840 * CFM * W ( 6 )

where: W = change in humidity ratio (lb water/lb air).

c) Ventilation Rates. Refer to ASHRAE Standard 62 orcontact the EFD or EFA for ventilation requirements for spacesnot listed below:

Auditoriums, theatersBarracks (sleeping rooms)Bedroom

ClassroomCommunication centersConference roomsCorridorsDiningKitchens (commercial)LobbiesLocker, dressing roomsLounges, barsOffices (with moderate smoking)Smoking lounge

Toilet, bath (private)Toi et (pub1 c

15 cfm/person15 cfm/person30 cfm/room

15 cfm/person20 cfm/person2 0 cfm/person0.1 cfm/sq ft20 cfm/person(refer to Section 3)15 cfm/person0.5 cfm/sq ft30 cfm/person20 cfm/person60 cfm/person

35 cfm/room50 cfm/water closet or urinal

The total corrected outdoor air requirement for centralsystems supplying spaces with different ratios ofoutdoor-air-to-supply-air is determined from the following:

EQUATION: CFMot = Y * CFMSt ( 7 )

43



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



where: CFMOt = corrected total outdoor air quantity,

CFMSt = total system airflow (i.e., sum of air suppliedto all spaces), and

Y = corrected fraction of outdoor air, or

EQUATION: Y = X / ( l + X - Z ) ( 8 )

where: X = CFM,,/CFMSt,

Z = CFM,,/CFM,,,

CFM,, = uncorrected sum of outdoor airflow rates forspaces on the system,

CFM,, = outdoor air required for critical space, and

CFM,, = supply air to the critical space. The criticalspace is that space with the greatest required fraction ofoutdoor air in the supply to that space.

d) VAV system ventilation issues. Refer toAppendix C.

5.3.3 Internal Loads

5.3.3.1 People Loads. Adjusted (normal male/fernale/child).

Sensible Latent

Office (seated light work, typing)Factory (light bench work)Factory (light machine work)Gymnasium athletics

5.3.3.2 Liuhts and Equipment

a) Lights

EQUATION: Q = 3.41 * W * F,1 * F,,

where: W = total light wattage,

F,1 = use factor, and

255 Btu/hr 255 Btu/hr345 Btu/hr 435 Btu/hr345 Btu/hr 695 Btu/hr635 Btu/hr 1165 Btu/hr

F,, = special allowance factor for fluorescent fixturesor for fixtures that release only part of their heat to theconditioned space.

44



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



b) Equipment

(1) Motors within conditioned space or withinairstream.

EQUATION: Q = 2545 * * Fim * F (10)E,

where: HP = motor horsepower,

E, = motor efficiency,

Flm = motor load factor, and

F = motor use factor.

(2) Appliances and equipment, such as business

machines and computers. Refer to ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentalsor contact the EFD or EFA for assistance in determining sensibleand latent heat gains from kitchen equipment.

EQUATION: Q, = 3.41 * w * F,, (11)

where: Q, = sensible load,

W = appliance wattage, and

Fu, = equipment use factor.

c) Heat Gain From Miscellaneous Sources

(1) HVAC Fan Motors (Outside the Airstream).Thirty-five percent of the input to an W A C fan motor isconverted to heat in the airstream because of fan inefficiency.Refer to par. 5.3.3.2 b) (1).

(2) HVAC Fan Motors (Within the Airstream). Themotor load is converted to heat. Refer to par. 5.3.3.2 b)(l).

(3) Duct Leakage. Loss of supply air due to duct

leakage shall be compensated by system capacity as follows:

(a) Well designed and constructed system:increase fan capacity by 3 percent.

(b) Poorly designed and constructed system:increase fan capacity by 10 percent.

45



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Section 6: AIR DISTRIBUTION

6.1 Duct Desicsn for W A C Svstems

6.1.1 Sizina General. See Figure 2 for duct sizing. ASHRAE

Handbook, Fundamentals recognizes three methods of sizingductwork: the equal friction method, the static regain method,and the T-method. For design of small simple systems, the equal

friction method will suffice. Use the static regain method forVAV design (refer to Appendix C ) .

6.1.2 Eaual Friction Method Sizinq. Select a constantpressure loss in inches of water per 100 foot length of duct fromthe preferred part of Figure 2.is between 0.08 and 0.6 inches of water per 100 feet frictionl o s s for air quantities up to 18,000 cfm, and between 1800 fpmand 4000 fpm for air quantities greater than 18,000 cfm. Use low

velocities and a low friction drop for small projects, or whereductwork is cheap and energy is expensive. For systems of 18,000

cubic feet per minute and over, use a friction loss of 0.08 andvelocities of 1800 to 3000 feet per minute. After sizing theentire system at the selected unit pressure drop, go back andadjust velocities and pressure drops in the shorter branches toequalize the pressure drops at each duct branch junction.designer must observe the recommended permissible room soundpressure levels for various applications discussed in NFGS-15895,Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories.

The preferred part of Figure 2

The

6.1.3 Ductwork General

6.1.3.1 Round Ducts. Use round ducts wherever possible. Undernormal applications, the minimum duct size shall be 4 inches indiameter. Use smooth curved elbows as much as possible. Ifthese are not available, use three-piece elbows for velocitiesbelow 1600 feet per minute and five-piece elbows for velocitiesabove 1600 feet per minute. The throat radius shall not be lessthan 0.75 times the duct diameter.

6.1.3.2 Rectanwlar Ducts. Use a minimum duct size of 6 inchesby 6 inches. Where possible, keep one dimension constant intransitions and do not make transitions in elbows. Maketransitions in sides and bottom of the duct keeping top level tomaintain maximum clearance above ceiling.shall be 30 degrees on the downstream. Where ductwork isconnected to equipment fittings such as coils, furnaces, orfilters, the transition shall be as smooth as possible. Drawingsshall indicate ductwork pitch, low spots, and means of disposingof the condensate. Elbows shall be smooth, with an inside radiusof 1.0 times the width of the duct. Where space constraints

The transition slope

46



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

MIL-HDBK-3003 /3 Ri 9 9 9 7 7 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 5 7 748

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Reprinted by permission of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, &

Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc., Atlanta, GA from ASH- Handbook,

Fundamentals.

4 7


Not for Resale, 10/08/2010 09:05:03 MDTproduction or networking permitted without li cense from IHS

-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 I 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273758 684 B

dictate use of mitered elbows, such elbows shall have singlethickness turning vanes.instead of single thickness vanes increases the pressure loss ofelbows by as much as 300 percent.table in ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals instead of matching areas

when you change aspect ratios. The aspect ratio is the ratio oflarger to smaller rectangular duct dimension.aspect ratio of 3 to 1 with a maximum aspect ratio of 6 to 1 orless.

Using double thickness turning vanes

Use the circular equivalents

Try to use an

6.1.3.3 Access Doors. Show access doors or panels in ductworkfor apparatus and devices for maintenance, inspection, andservicing.

6.1.3.4 Flexible Ducts. To save construction expense, flexibleduct may be used to connect ceiling outlets. Limit the length of

flexible ducts to straight runs of 5 feet.

by having equal lengths of flexible ducts instead of long andshort lengths on the same branch.elbows, including connection to diffusers; provide elbows atceiling diffusers. Do not use flexible ducts in industrialventilation systems.

Seek self-balancing

Do not use flexible ducts for

6.1.3.5 RooftoD Ductwork. Rooftop ducts exposed to the weathercan leak rain water.life. One way to avoid such problems is to put insulation insidethe duct, and then use galvanized steel ductwork with solderedjoints and seams.coating and wrapping throughout, where it must be used; such as

on kitchen exhaust hoods containing grease.

Exterior insulation tends to have a short

Exterior insulation shall have weatherized

6.1.3.6 Glass Fiber Ductwork. Investigate the bidding climatein your local area before deciding that ductwork made from glassfiber panels will always be less expensive than galvanized steelductwork. Fiberglass ductwork should be coated inside to avoidbacteria growth. In some parts of the country the sheet metalsubcontractor can make or buy metal ducts made on an automaticmachine at competitive prices.

6.1.3.7 Balancina DamDers for W A C . Provide balancing damperson duct branches and show dampers on drawings. See Figure 3 for

damper installation. Use extractors or volume dampers instead ofsplitter dampers at branch connections. Do not use splitterdampers since they make ductwork more difficult to balance than ajob with volume dampers. Provide access in the ceiling and

clamping quadrants for dampers or use a type with a remotecontrol that extends through the ceiling.should be located away from the intake louver and after the ducttransition to minimize exposure to weather and oversizing of

Outdoor air dampers



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~~ ~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 5 9 5 3 0 IIMIL-HDBK-1003/3

EXTRACTOR-

+R THIS

4-JOF? THIS

REG STER

NOT THIS NOT THIS

Figure 3Damper Installation

4 9



--` , , , , ,`

,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



M I L -H D B K -1 0 0 3 / 3 9999970 0273760 232 II

dampers. Avoid using balancing dampers for industrialventilation (IV) systems. Design IV ductwork so that the systemwill function properly without balancing dampers. Do not usebalancing dampers when designing a VAV system. A VAV system withductwork designed using the static regain method and properlysized VAV terminal units is inherently self-balancing.Appendix C for additional information.

Refer to

6.1.3.8 Fire Dampers and Smoke DamDers

a) Fire Dampers. The term "fire damper" usually meansa curtain type damper which is released by a fusible link andcloses by gravity or a mechanical spring.mounted in walls of fire rated construction to ensure integrityof the space.of flame through a fire rated assembly is prohibited. Refer topar. 4.1.3 for duct pressure classification requirements.

Fire dampers are

Fire dampers should be installed where the passage

b) Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers. The term"combination fire and smoke damper" usually means a fire damperwhich is automatically controlled by an external source (such asa fire alarm control panel or energy management system) to stoppassage of both fire and smoke. Combination fire and smokedampers should be installed where passage of fire or smoke isprohibited.be by several methods including pneumatic damper operators,electric damper operators, and electro-thermal links.Electro-thermal links include explosive squibs which are notrestorable and McCabe type links which are restorable.

Pneumatically operated dampers are the preferred method of damperactivation, and should be configured in the fail-safe mode suchthat loss of pneumatic pressure will result in dampers closure.

Activation of combination fire and smoke dampers can

in electronic data processing rooms, combination fireand smoke dampers should be installed in walls with a fireresistance rating of 1 hour or greater.either fire dampers or combination fire and smoke dampers shouldbe installed in walls with a fire resistance rating of 2 hours orgreater.smoke through a barrier (e.g., hospitals), the installation of acombination fire and smoke damper is required.

In other type spaces,

Where a smoke damper is required to stop passage of

c) Mounting Details. Fire dampers and combinationfire and smoke dampers must remain in the wall during a fire.Though ductwork may collapse, the damper should remain in thefire rated assembly, therefore, indicate on drawings the detailsfor attaching dampers to the wall.materials between the damper collar and the wall, floor, orceiling assembly where penetrated.

Use UL listed firestopping

50



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀

̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 9999970 0 2 7 1 7 b L 179 E

6.1.3.9 Fan System Effect Factors. Fans are tested and ratedbased upon a certain standard ductwork arrangement. If installedductwork creates adverse flow conditions at the fan inlet or fanoutlet, loss of fan performance is defined as a system effectfactor.

or configurations near the fan inlet and outlet. For example,failure to recognize the affect on performance of swirl at thefan inlet will have an adverse effect on system performance.Figure 4 for methods to minimize fan system effect factors.Refer to Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 201, Fansand Systems for additional information on fans and systemeffects.

The system effect factor can be caused by obstructions

See

6.1.4 Ductwork Details

6.1.4.1 Branches. See Figure 5 and Figure 6.

6.1.4.2 Elbows. See Figure 7.

6.1.4.3 Offsets and Transitions. See Figure 8.

6.1.5 Testina and Balancinq. Ensure duct design includesadequate provision for testing and balancing, including straightsections of duct with ports for velocity measurement. Airstraighteners may be required if sufficient lengths of straightduct are not available.

6.2 Fans for W A C Systems

6 . 2 . 1 Fan Selection

6.2.1.1 Major TVDes of W A C Fans. See Table 7.

6.2.1.2 Size. In most applications, the fan capacity requiredis a function of heating and cooling loads, except where there isa minimum prescribed air movement, such as an operating suite ina hospital.

For the total room sensible heat load, calculate theminimum supplyfollows:

EQUATION: CFM

where: CFM =

T, =

T, =

air quantity to satisfy the sensible heat load as

= Q,/(T, - T,) * 1.10 (12)

supply air quantity (cubic feet per minute),

room design temperature (degrees F dry bulb), and

supply air temperature (degrees F dry bulb)

51



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```, ,̀```,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



~ ~ ~

M I L - HDBK- L 0 0 3 / 3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0271762 005IMIL-HDBK-1003/3

The quantity of supply air shall also be calculatedusing the cooling load calculation from equation (5) ofpar. 5.3.2.

Add the extra dehumidification load of ventilation air

(due to lower room humidity) to the grand total heat load.

6.2.1.3 Sound Ratinq. In large central systems, one shouldstart with the noise limit that may be tolerated in the selectedroom criteria and than work backwards through the system to thefan. ASHRAE Handbook, W A C Svstems and Applications containsnoise guidance, and Army TM 5-805-4 gives noise criteria forvarious room types.noise criteria.

See Table 2-1 of Army "M 5-805-4 for indoor

By isolating the fan on vibration pads, selecting a fanin the efficient range, and utilizing the attenuation of

ductwork; the fan and air noise can be controlled. Refer to thefan manufacturer's data sheet for fan noise values.

6 .2 .1 .4 Static Pressure Remirement. To select a fan from thefan manufacturer's fan curves, it becomes necessary to establishthe system static pressure requirement as well as the volume ofair delivery. With some types of packaged equipment, this ratingis called "external static pressure" and static pressure dropsrequired by coils, filters, etc., inside the equipment havealready been allowed. With central system fans, however, thestatic pressure requirement in the entire system must beestablished to select the total fan static pressure.

individual manufacturers rate their equipment and check theircurves and tables for system effects. Select fans so that theywill remain stable and not overload at any operating condition.

Verify how

drop calculations

(1)

( 2 1

(3

( 4 )

( 5 )condition),

(6)

a) Pressure Drop of Air Handling Systems. Pressureof air handling systems shall include:

Outdoor air intake louvers,

Dampers

Air filters (average between clean and dirty),

Heating coils,

Cooling coils (wet, dry, or sprayed

Moisture eliminators,

52



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~~~~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 R I 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 6 3 T 4 L iMIL-HDBK-1003/3

Reprinted by permission of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, &

Air-conditioning Engineers, Inc., Atlanta, GA from ASH- Handbook

Fundamentals.

INtEf DUCT CONNECTIONSCAUSING INLET SPIN

CORRICTEOPRZ-AOTATJNG SWIR L

I

ROtAt iOy

TURNINGVANES

CORRECTIONS FOR INLET SPIN

53



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



Figure 5Duct Branches

54



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 1 7 b 5 814 6

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

I

i

Figure 6

Duct Branches

55



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

15

TYPE RE 3RAODCISELBOW

WIT" VANES

MPERE4SOUARE TWRMT ELBOW

W IYHWTVANESCiao0 FP M MAXIMUM VELOUM)

TYPERESWALW U S ELBOW MITERED O L S W

BEAD. CRossmw ANO REINFORCE FLATSURFACES AS JNS ~ I G H TUCT

Figure 7Duct Elbows

56



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~ ~

M I L - H D B K - L C 0 3 / 3 0 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 1 i ib7 b 9 7 Ip

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

OFFSETTYPE 1(ANGLEDI

, =w,

STANDARD BEUMûülHIO N SHORT PATTERN BEL1

C *3",8 = A +a'.)

Figure 8Duct Offsets and Transitions

57



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,`

` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-3003/3 H îîïïï70 0273768 5 2 3 =MIL-HDBK-IOO3/3

Table 7Major Types of W A C Fans

Centrifugal with backwardinclined airfoil blades

Backward inclined centrifugal

Forward inclined centrifugal

Vane axial

Propeller

HVAC ADDlication

Large HVAC systems where fanenergy efficiency becomessignificant

General HVAC

Low pressure HVAC, mainly infurnaces and package equipment

General HVAC where compact size

and straight flow is wanted

Equipment room ventilation andgeneral ventilation for comfortcooling

(7) Fan entrance (including vortex dampers),

(8) Fan discharge (based on discharueconfiguration), and

(9) Velocity pressure loss (if fan outlet velocityis lower than duct velocity).

b) Pressure Drop of Duct Systems. Pressure dropcalculations of duct systems shall include:

(1) Straight unlined or lined ductwork,

( 2 ) Static pressure regain or loss due totransitions,

(3) Fittings,

(4) Branch takeoffs,

5 8



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



~~~

MIL - HDBK- 1003 /3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 O t 7 1 7 b 9 4bT m

( 5 ) Obstructions,

(6) Fire and smoke control dampers,

(7) Regulating dampers,

(8) Takeoff neck for air terminal devices,

( 9 ) Air terminal devices, and

(10) Sound traps.

6.2.1.5system, check fan operating characteristics throughout the rangefrom minimum to maximum flow conditions operating conditions.Fans should not be selected that will become unstable oroverloaded for any operating condition. Fan manufacturer shall

be AMCA certified. Refer to Appendix C for additionalinformation.

VAV Fan Selection. When selecting a fan for a VAV

6.3 Economizer Cvcle. The economizer cycle providescooling without refrigeration using outdoor air when outdoor airdry bulb temperature is below a predetermined temperature wherethe total heat of outdoor air is likely to be lower than that ofthe return air.particularly attractive for facilities that have interior zonesrequiring year around cooling or for facilities with internalheat gains higher than heat losses through the envelope of thebuilding. The economizer cycle should only be used with approvalof the EFD or EFA. Refer to pars. 8.2, 8.3, 8.4, and 8.5 for therecommended control sequence.

Economics of the economizer cycle is

6.4 Terminal Eauipment. Conditioned air is delivered tothe room through terminal equipment such as grills, registers,ceiling diffusers, etc. To achieve appropriate air diffusionwithin the room, the terminal equipment should provide:

a) Mixing of conditioned air with room air, and

b) Counteraction of natural convection and radiation

effects within the room.

The scheme used to deliver conditioned air to the roomdepends upon room size, geometry, exposures, and use patterns.Outlet types include grills and diffusers mounted in or near theceiling and floor or low sidewall outlets.be selected to adequately throw supply air across the room;

provide good mixing to prevent drafts; to counter the buoyancyeffect of temperature differences; and to avoid obstructions such

Outlet types shouldto

59



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 W 9999970 0271770 181 II

as beams and light fixtures that could divert supply air directlyon the occupants. Linear slot diffusers are important in VAVsystems (refer to Appendix C).

6.5 Louvers

a) Louvers are used to admit supply air, dischargeexhaust air, or admit return air to the ductwork system.these are detailed on architectural drawings and installed underarchitectural sheet metal because the architectural designerwants to control the esthetics of the building exterior.Consider the following in placement of intake louvers so theyare

Often

(1) Not exposed to blowing dust, driving rain,high winds, auto exhaust fumes (loading docks), embanked snow, orfalling leaves.

(2) Away from known odors, airborne contaminants,cooling towers, and industrial exhaust stacks (25 foot minimum).

( 3 ) Away from building entrances where radiatednoise from the fan equipment could be annoying.

( 4 ) Away from building exhaust air, buildingplumbing vents, and odors from kitchen hood exhausts, andlaboratory exhausts.

b) In the design of louver blades, a proper compromise

must be made between maximum net free area and trapping ofwindblown rain. See Figure 9 for a typical rain resistantlouver.

c) Keep air velocities low through louver intakes toavoid noise and excessive pressure drops.based on the percent of free flow area for the louver and thepressure drop through insect and bird screens.

Compute pressure drop

d) For industrial ventilation systems with fume hoods,makeup air should be introduced through a perforated ceiling,ceiling panels, or perforated ducts to distribute the airuniformly throughout the room.

6.6 Filters for WAC Svstems. Use high efficiency filtersonly if the mission requires clean air since they cost more toinstall and maintain, take more space, and use more energy. Highefficiency filters should be preceded by pre-filters to extend

60



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 m 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273771 DL8 m

their life.mission requirements. Some available filter types and their

Use the least efficient filter that will satisfy

_ _following:pplications include the

Filter Type

Flat throwaway

Flat permanent

Roughing or pre-filters

High efficiency air(HEPA) filters

Renewable media(auto-cleaning)

Electrostatic

Consider also

Applications

Window air conditioners, warm airfurnaces, packaged unitary equipment,central air handlers (when highefficiency is not required)

Same as for flat throwaway but requirecleaning

For removing larger particles ahead ofhigh efficiency filters to extendfilter life

Operating rooms, clean rooms,protective shelters

Large outdoor air systems with highdust loads to reduce frequency offilter changes; roughing or pre-filters

For high efficiency with low pressuredrop (precede with pre-filter to reducecleaning requirements)

the ambient dust level of the air.

A classic illustration of poor design is a building ata desert station with low air intakes located adjacent to anunlandscaped helipad. Each time a helicopter lands or takes off,huge quantities of dust are drawn into the W A C filters. When

selecting a filter bank for an installation, consider the type offan and the fan curve. A packaged cabinet fan unit with forwardcurved blades may not have sufficient static pressure to maintainrequired airflow with dirty HEPA filters.

6.7 Access for InsDection and Maintenance. Airdistribution systems of an W A C plant require access forinspection and maintenance.motors, and fan belts will be replaced and cleaned. Designsystems to avoid the following:

During design consider how filters,

a) Using a step ladder in the middle of an officeremove a ceiling tile and rig portable lighting to maintainequipment.

to

61



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` `

` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ - - -

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 .II 5 7 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 7 2 T 5 4 IMIL-HDBK-1003/3

Birdscreen

Figuwe 9

Hooked Louver Blade

b) Need to crawl on hands and knees under ductwork carrying filters,tools, etc.

c) Need to climb over a rooftop screening fence to get to roofmounted W A C equipment.

d) Use of a vertical ladder to open a roof hatch while carryingfilters, tools, etc.

e) Need to rig a portable walkway in a ceiling assembly to approacha remote fan coil unit or other equipment.

6.8 VAV System Design. Unless VAV systems are well designed andexpertly installed, problems can develop. Refer to Appendix C for designconsiderations.

6.9 Ductwork Pressure-Velocity Classification, It is essential that

ductwork pressure-velocity classification be specified clearly in drawings for

each duct system. Note the following:

a) Ductwork pressure-velocity classification may be different fordifferent ductwork systems.

62



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 7 9 9 9 9 7 0 0271773 590 8

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

b) Ductwork pressure-velocity classification may bedifferent at different parts of any single duct system.

c) SMACNA W A C duct construction standards should beused for pressure-velocity classification.

d) SMACNA classifications are based on maximum staticpressure as follows:

STATIC PRESSURE

Pressure Class Operating Pressure

1/2" WG1" WG2" WG3 " WG

4" WG6" WG10" WG

Up to 1 / 2 " WGOver 1/2" WG to 1" WGOver 1" WG to 2 " WGOver 2 " WG to 3 " WG

Over 3 " WG to 4" WGOver 4" WG to 6 " WGOver 6 " WG to 10" WG

See Figure 10 for an example of how to delineate ductpressure class designation.

6 3



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,`

,̀ , ,` ---



~ ~-~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 E 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 7 4 ô 2 7 6

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Figure 10Duct Pressure Class Designation

6 4


Not for Resale, 10/08/2010 09:05:03 MDTproduction or networking permitted without license fr om IHS

- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` `

, ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 9999970 0271775 7b 3 e

Section 7: PIPING SYSTEMS

7.1 General

7.1.1 Pix>ins Desian Factors. Consider the choice betweensteel and copper piping based on estimated initial cost and lifecycle cost of each installation. For a safe pressure of pipingand fittings corresponding to working pressure and temperature,refer to ASME B31.1, Power PiDinq. See Table 8.

Copper piping cannot be corroded by fluorinatedhydrocarbon refrigerants, even when this liquid is mixed withmoisture. Copper is entirely free of scaling effects. However,steel pipe and fittings are less expensive than copper piping fornon-refrigerant systems with larger pipe sizes.

7.1.2 PiDe Friction Loss. For pipe friction loss, see

Figures 11 through 13 for water flow and Figures 18 through 21for steam flow.

7.1.3 System Pressure Loss. Piping system pressure losscalculations shall include the following considerations:

a) Pipe friction based on 10-year-old pipe;

b) Pressure loss of valves, fittings, and otherassociated equipment;

c) Equipment pressure loss;

d) Static lift in open systems.

7.1.4 Pipina Layouts. Piping layouts shall provide for flowcontrol, subsystem isolation, pipe expansion, elimination ofwater hammer, air removal, drainage, and cathodic protection.

Isolation valves are required in piping systems. To controlcorrosion, provide cathodic protection as required due topresence of dissimilar metals, stray currents, or soilcomposition (if using direct burial pipe), as described inMIL-HDBK-1004/10, Electrical Encrineerinq Cathodic Protection.

7.1.5 Emansion. Preferred methods of accommodating thermalexpansion are by pipe geometry, e.g., offsets and changes indirection, and pipe loops. Offsets that would cause torsionshould be avoided with screwed fittings to prevent the potentialfor leaking joints.not permit proper geometry or installation of pipe loops.expansion as a function of temperature for steel and copper pipe,and general expansion criteria, see Table 12 of MIL-HDBK-l003/8A,

Use expansion joints only when space does

For

6 5



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-3003/3 E 9 9 9 9 7 7 0 0273776 b T T S

Exterior Distribution of Utilitv Steam, Hish TemDerature Water(HTW), Chilled Water, Natural Gas and ComDressed Air. For

information on piping flexibility design, refer to Crocker,Pir>ina Handbook, Kellogg, Desian of PiDins Svstems, or similarreferences.

7.1.6 Emansion Loor>. On straight pipes, always useexpansion loops if space conditions permit.

7.1.7 Packina-Tme Emansion and Ball Joints. Providepacking-type expansion and ball joints only if they can belocated in accessible areas.used for refrigerant piping.be used, however, for chilled water, hot water, or steam linesunder limited conditions.giving a warning by leakage.

These expansion joints shall not bePacking-type expansion joints can

Packing-type joints fail slowly,

7.1.8 Bellows Emansion Joints. Use bellows-type expansionjoints where piping is not easily accessible.joints can fail suddenly without warning and should not be usedwhere personnel would be endangered by a rupture.

Bellows-type

7.1.9 SuDDorts and Anchors. Expansion joints should be

provided with guides to prevent undue bending movement. Pipingbetween expansion joints should have supports designed to carrythe weight of the pipe and fluid together with axial frictionloads and the thrust of the expansion joint.should be anchored to prevent excessive strain on branches.Consider whether the building structure will withstand the thrustof piping on the anchor. In light steel or wood framestructures, consider allowing the piping system to float withexpansion loops but without anchors.

Risers and mains

a) Supports. Provide shields between the insulationand the supports of insulated piping.supports where horizontal pipe is subject to thermal expansion.Provide vertical pipes and main risers with base elbows designedto take the weight of the pipe from the elbow up to the firstanchor.

Provide roller-type guided

b) Hangers. Provide hangers with vibration isolators,as required. Hangers shall be massive enough to limit thevibration amplitude. Pipe supports shall be wide enough to avoidany swivel action.

accommodate expansion in vertical piping. Provide seismicsupport in the lateral direction where this is appropriate.

Use spring hangers when required to

6 6



- - ` ,

, , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 E 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 7 7 536I

Table 8Piping Materials

SERVICE

Suction line(Refrigerant

Liquid line(Refrigerant)

Hot Gas Line(Refrigerant

Chilled Water

Condenser orMakeup Water

PIPE

Hard copper tubing

Type L(1)Steel pipe, standardwall lap welded orseamless for sizeslarger than 2 in. IPS

Hard copper tubing

Type L ( 1 )

Steel pipe: extrastrong wall for sizes1-1/2 in. IPS andsmaller. Standard Walfor sizes larger than1-1/2 in. IPS, lapwelded or seamless forsizes larger than 2 in.IPS

FITTINGS

Wrought copper, wroughtBrass, or tinned castbrass, 150 lb welded orthreaded malleable iron

Wrought copper, wroughtor tinned cast brass,300 lb welded orthreaded malleable iron

Hard copper tubing Wrought copper, wroughtType L ( 1 ) brass or tinned castSteel pipe, standard brass, 300 lb welded or

wall lap welded or threaded malleable ironseamless for sizeslarger than 2 in. IPS

Black or galvanized Welded, galvanized,steel pipe (2) cast, malleable, orHard copper tubing 2 black iron (3

Cast brass, wroughtcopper, or wrought brass

Galvanized steel Welded, galvanized cast,

pipe(2) malleable iron(3)

Cast brass, wroughtcopper, or wrought brass

67



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` --

-



~ ~~

MIL-HDûK-3003/3 ï ï ï ï ï i 0 0 2 7 3 7 7 8 4 7 2 8

Table 8 (Continued)Piping Materials

SERVICE PIPE FITTINGS

Drain or Galvanized steel Galvanized, drainage,Condensate pipe (2 cast, or malleableLines iron 3

Hard copper Cast brass, wroughttubing (2) copper, or wrought brass

Steam o r Black steel pipe(2), 4 ) Welded or cast iron(3)Condensate Hard copper tubing(21, Cast brass, wrought

(4) copper, o r wrought brass

Hot Water Cast steel pipe Welded or cast iron(3)Hard copper tubing (2 Cast brass, wrought

copper, or wrought brass

Soft copper Type L can be used for sizes 7/8 in. OD andsmaller, except f o r sizes 1/4 in. and 3/8 in. OD (Type Kmust be used for 1/4 in. and 3/8 in. OD sizes).

Normally standard wall steel pipe or Type L hard coppertubing is satisfactory for air conditioning applications,however, the piping material selected shall be checkedfor design temperature-pressure ratings.

Normally 125 lb cast iron and 150 lb malleable iron

fittings are satisfactory for air conditioningapplications, however, the fitting material selectedshall be checked for temperature-pressure ratings.

For steam condensate return lines use Schedule 80 blacksteel or Schedule 80 wrought iron pipe. Where hardcopper tubing is used, check for compatibility withcondensate.

7.1.10 Flexible Hose. Flexible connections can be installedbetween moving components and piping.flexible hoses as a union point.end, away from moving components.

Consider the dual use ofPipe shall be anchored at the

68



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



f l IL -HDBK-L003/3 9999970 0271779 309

7 . 2 Water Svstems

7.2.1 General. The following applies to both hot and chilledwater systems.

7.2.1.1 Exterior Water PiDincr Desian. For exterior pipingdesign criteria, refer to MIL-HDBK-l003/8A.

7.2.1.2 Water Velocitv. Noise, erosion, and pumping costs canbe excessive if the water velocity selected is too high.Installation costs become excessive if the selected watervelocity is too low. Table 9 gives recommendations:

Table 9Water Velocities

TvDe of Service Recommended Velocitv ( f D S L

General Service 4 to 7

City Water 3 to 7

Boiler Feed 6 to 15

Pump Suction and Drain Lines 4 to 7

7.2.1.3 Water Treatment. Selection of a water treatment systemis based on analysis of makeup water and its anticipatedcontribution to internal corrosion and scale formation indistribution piping and heat transfer equipment, both of whichwill affect system efficiency and capacity.

water treatment specialist to perform a water analysis, if notavailable at the site, and to make specific recommendations ontype and quantity of chemicals used. Coordinate the decision ontype of chemicals specified with the local environmental programmanager to ensure chemicals can be properly handled and disposedof and that pollution control regulations are properly addressed.

Obtain services of a

69



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



7.2.1.4 Pipe Sizinq. Refer to ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals orFigures 11, 12 , and 1 3 for pipe sizing. Guidance parameters forsizing are as follows:

a) Charts are based on use of 60 degree F water.

are conservative (e.g., overestimate the pressure drop) for 200degree F water; and are not conservative for chilled water.

They

b) A mean pressure drop selection might be 2.5feet/100 feet. Pressure drops of over 4 feet/100 feet can beused for pipes over 2 inches in diameter.

c) Keep the minimum velocity above 2 feet per second,and increase this velocity in down-feed return mains.velocities cause separation of entrained air in the mains.

Lower

7 .2 .1 .5 Valve and Fittina Pressure Drops. Add the equivalent

valve and fitting piping length to the system when performinghydronic computations.

7 . 2 . 1 . 6 Return Arranaements. The two-pipe reverse returnsystem has two mains, one supplying and one returning water from

heating units. The return piping is longer than that of a directreturn system and is arranged so that the equivalent lengths ofsupply and return piping to any heating unit are about equal.Use reverse return piping arrangements on closed systems, if all

units or parallel circuits have nearly equal resistance. Do not

use reverse return piping on open or once-through systems.Provide a reverse return in an up-feed system, and provide a

reverse supply in a down-feed system. Isolation and drain valvesare required in piping systems.

7 .2 .1 .7 Air Vents. Water flow, especially through heattransfer equipment, shall be directed to permit natural airventing. Install air vents at system high points.

7.2.2 Hot Water Heatina Svstems

7 . 2 . 2 . 1 Hot Water Pipinq. Refer to pars. 7 . 1 and 7 . 2 . 1 forpiping and pipe sizing.

7 .2 .2 .2 Hot Water Coils. Hot water coils are used in ducts ofan W A C system to heat the air. Their extended surface isprovided by fins that are bonded to the coil tube. The mostcommon design is attaching aluminum fins to copper tubing with amechanical bond.with supply water entering the coil low and return high so thecoil will be self-venting of any entrained air that enters the

coil.

Headers are usually provided between the tubes,

7 0



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 E 9 9 9 7 7 7 0 0271781 T b 7 1111MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Reprinted by permission of ASH-, from A S H M Handbook, Fundamentals.

Figure 11F r i c t i o n Loss for Water in Commercial S t e e l Pipe (Schedule 4 0 )

FLOW W E . S.mllmio

Figure 12Friction Loss for Water in Copper Tubing (Types K, L, M )

71



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~~ ~

M I L- i DB K - l 0 0 3 / 3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 1 7 8 2 9 T 3 =MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Reprinted by permission of ASHRAE, from ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals.

I FLOW RATE, IJS. FiaIlmin i

Figure 13F r i c t i o n Loss for Water in Pl a s t i c Pipe (Schedule 8 0 )

a)is air in the piping.

to the return main is appropriately sloped up and vented to eliminateentrained air that can air lock the flow.

Hot Water Piping to Coil. Water coils will not perform if thereEnsure that the piping from the main, to the coil, and

b) Hot Water Coil Selection. Consult the manufacturer’s catalogdata to decide the best selection, number of rows, parallel or counter flow,

turbulators or serpentines, and other selection information. Using the

appropriate type, make the coil selection:

(1) Capacity required

( 2 ) Water temperature in and out

(3) Air temperature in and out

( 4 ) Airflow

( 5 ) Water flow

(6) Air pressure drop

72



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273783 83T m

MIL-HDBK- 10.03 / 3

(7) Water pressure drop

( 8 ) Coil face velocity

( 9 ) Any special requirements

After the coil selection has been made and documentedin the design analysis, be sure to provide the above data in thecoil schedule on drawings. This will ensure a good biddingclimate, with equipment manufacturers knowing what to bid, andwhat to submit in the shop drawings phase.

7.2.2.3 Emansion Tanks and Air SeDarator

a) Expansion Tanks General. When water in a hot waterheating system is heated, water expands and occupies more volume.System pressure control is needed to:

(1)the allowable working pressure.

Limit pressure in all parts of the system to

( 2 ) Maintain minimum pressure in the system toprevent pump cavitation and to prevent boiling of system water.

( 3 ) Minimize addition of makeup water.

b) Expansion Tank With Air Separator. An expansiontank with an air separator performs these system pressure controlfunctions. Since this section does not address medium

temperature hot water system (250 to 350 degrees F) or hightemperature hot water system (above 350 degrees F); discussionwill be limited to the following types of tanks:

(1) Closed expansion tanks with an air cushion.See Figure 14.

(2) Diaphragm (or bladder) type closed expansiontanks. See Figure 15.

Open expansion tanks located at the system high point

will also work on low temperature hot water systems, but are notgenerally used on Navy building projects.

c) Expansion Tanks. Some specifics regardingexpansion tanks are as follows:

(1) Expansion tanks are required on chilled waterand hot water systems.

73



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~~

MIL-HDBK-2003/3 9999970 0273784 7 7 b .I

( 2 ) Locate the tank on the suction side of thesystem pump so that system pressure is always positive withrespect to atmospheric pressure.

(3) Do not install a shutoff valve between theheat source and the expansion tank.

(4) Refer to ASHRAE Handbook, W A C Svstems andApplication or manufacturer's literature for tank sizing.

(5) See Figure 14 for closed expansion tankplacement.

(6) See Figure 15 for diaphragm expansion tankplacement.

(7) Do not use a gage glass on the expansion tank.

A gage glass on a steam boiler is permitted since the wet steamvapor keeps the upper glass packing tight. With an expansiontank, the air will dry out the upper gage glass packing and causeair leaks.

7.2.2.4 Domestic Hot Water Generator. An interface occursbetween the heating system and the plumbing system when boilersteam or boiler hot water is used to heat water for plumbingfixtures.are as follows:

Some points to consider in heating domestic hot water

a) Domestic water can be heated by the boiler (steamor hot water) or a separate hot water generator, if the heatingsource is available during the summer.heating boiler, evaluate boiler efficiency for summer operation.

If heated by the space

b) If the space heating boiler provides hot water,evaluate if it should be an instantaneous heater, a semi-instantaneous heater, or a storage type hot water generator. The

selection will affect the boiler capacity specified. Refer toNAVFAC DM-3-01, lumbins Svstems for domestic hot water systemdesign.

With these decisions made, select the hot water systemand equipment. See Figure 16 and Figure 17.

7.2.2.5 Heat Exchansers. Heat exchangers are used for steam toheat water. One medium flows through the shell, and the othermedium flows through the tubes in the tube bundle. Include thefollowing in the equipment schedule:

a) Water flow

74



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MI L - HDBK- 1 0 0 3 / 3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 8 5 602

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

W E - C P

-7

PRESSUREREDUCING VALV E

BOILER PRESSURE

RELIEF VALVE /I1

- I ] , ~ F < h . S XON

SUPPLYMAIN

tI

I

BOILER

FLûW CONTROL

DXP TUBE

Figure 14Closed Expansion Tank

75



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



f l I L - HDBK- L 0 0 3 / 3 9999970 027178b 549 mMIL-HDBK-1003/3

BOILER PRESSIIRE I L

P W

.-y?REDUCïNG VALVE

DLAPHRAGM

EXPANSION TANK

Figure 15Diaphragm Expansion Tank

76



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` --

-



EXPANSION mm

MAKE-UPWATER

PRESSUREREDUCING VALVF

I SUB-MASTER- I -HASTER

PRESSURERELIEF VALVE

Figure 16Connect ions to Converter for Hot Water Heating System

77



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

`

, ` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-1003/3 ï ï î î î 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 8 8 311

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

RELIEF i

NO SCALE

Figure 17Domestic Hot Water Generator and Heating

Hot Water Boiler Piping Connection

b) Inlet water temperature

c) Leaving water temperature

d) Water pressure head loss

e) Inlet steam pressure

78



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~ ~ -~~

f lIL-HDBK-3003/3 U 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 O273789 256

f) Steam flow

g) Trap size and rating

h) Shell pressure rating

i) Tube bundle pressure rating

j) Control Vaive cv

k) Temperature control scheme (e.g., resetting thewater temperature from the outdoor temperature)

Converters shall be ASME rated and stamped. Detail thesupports for the converter and the expansion tank. See Figures16 and 17.

7 . 2 . 2 . 6 PumDs. In hydronic systems that are larger thanresidential size, a two pipe system with a circulating pump isrequired to make the heating system responsive to load changes.Note the following:

a) Provide a pressure gage on each side of the pump,or a differential gage connected between pump suction anddischarge to facilitate system balancing.

b) Provide flow gages in the branches of multizonesystems to facilitate balancing.

c) Provide gate valves and unions or flanges on inletand outlet piping to equipment to expedite future removal andrepairs.

d) Provide strainers on the suction side of the pump.

e) Do not overestimate the pumping head on the pump.A conservative overestimation of the head can result in the pumpdelivering more than the required gpm and thereby requiring morehorsepower than estimated. There are three solutions to this:

(1) Specify a pump that is non-overloading,

(2) Show a throttling valve in the pump dischargeto increase the head if needed, and

( 3 ) Remove the impeller and machine it to reducecapacity

79



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL -HDBK-1 0 0 3 /3 I 1 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 9 0 T 7 T

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

f ) Low temperature hot water heating systems are oftendesigned for a 20 degree F temperature drop.to size the pump--divide the Btu's by 10,000 to obtain the pump

gPm

This makes it easy

g) Pumping systems that are open, such as coolingtowers, or systems with hot liquids, such as a deaerator feedpump, require special attention to ensure proper NSPH. Keep thepump low enough and close enough to maintain proper NPSH.

h) Calculate pipe and fitting friction drop, the headloss through the coils, control valves, heat exchanger, etc. Tothis add any static head, if the system is not a closed system.

Also add nozzle loss for spray equipment, such as evaporative

condensers, cooling towers with nozzles, or air washers.

I) Arrange pumps in parallel, i.e., one pump for each

boiler, chiller, cooling tower, etc.

7.2.3 Chilled Water

7.2.3.1 PiDe Size. Refer to pars. 7.1 and 7.2.1. For dualtemperature systems, note that the required temperaturedifference and the required flow may be different for heating andfor cooling operation.

7.2.3.2 Coils. Refer to par. 7.2.2.2. Note the following:

a) Multiple rows may be needed for humidity control.

With cooling coils it is important to specify the entering andleaving wet bulb temperature and add the latent load ofdehumidification.

b) Dehumidifying coils will need drip pans and drains.

7.2.3.3 Emansion Tanks. Refer to par. 7.2.2.3. Expansiontanks are required to provide for change in water volume due tochanges in temperature.

7.2.3.4 Pum~s. Refer to par. 7.2.2.6. It is common with largechilled water systems to check the economics of pumping systems.Is it lower cost to pump more or less flow on the chilled waterand cooling water circuits? Should colder chilled water, smalleror larger pipes, a bigger chiller, warmer condenser water, orsmaller cooling towers be used?economics on several alternatives to select the most costeffective solution.

Evaluate the life cycle

80



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

,

̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



7.3 Steam

7.3.1 General. Low pressure steam in HVAC systems is definedas 15 psi or less. High pressure steam in W A C systems isdefined as being 16 psi to 150 psi. There is a trend away from

using direct steam in W A C systems. If one gets heat fromdistrict steam or a steam boiler, the designer will often convertthe steam to hot water through a heat exchanger to supply theHVAC system. The reasons for using hot water WA C systemsinclude the following:

a) Eliminates maintenance of many steam traps.

b) More flexible when planning temperature controls.

7.3.2 Low Pressure Steam Svstems

7.3.2.1 PiDe Sizinq. Pipe sizing for low pressure steam andreturn mains is found in A S H m Handbook, Fundamentals. SeeTables 10 through 13. Note the following:

a) Slope steam mains in the direction of the flow(M inch in 10 feet is recommended).

b) Slope return mains similarly.

c) Avoid lifts on low pressure returns, or make themsmall.

d) Pumped returns are preferred to gravity returns.

e) Provide a step-up and drip at the base of steamrisers.

f) Drip the low point if steam flow is against thecondensate flow and upsize piping to the next larger size toallow condensate to run back in the bottom of the steam pipe.

7.3.3 Hiah Pressure Steam Svstems

7.3.3.1 PiDe Sizinq. Refer to par. 7.3.2.1. Note thefollowing:

a) See Figures 18 through 21 for steam pipe sizing.

81



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-3003/3 em qqqqq70 0273792 a 4 2 aMIL-HDBK-1003/3

Table 10Flow Rate i n l b / h of Steam Schedule 4 0 Pipea

at I n i t i a l Saturation Pressure of 3.5 and 12 p i g b r c

1%

IH

2

tin

33 'A

45

68

I O

I2

365b

IC4I74318

462

61012001920

m

7200I I «)o

45

70

134215

3 8 0

33 0

8001430u00

4800

8800

I 3 70 0

84

i6 22584bs670

950168028205570

10 200I6 MO

66

IO

I943IOJ50am

I1602100

3350Moo

12 60019 Mo

78120

234318660990

1410244039608100

15 WOu400- -

96I47

mJ

aio46a

1218

1690Moo4850

I O OOD

is 20028500

111174

3%WD960irlo

I 803370

3700II roo

21 Mb33 Doo

Based on Moody Friction Factor, w h e r e t h e flow of condensatedoes not inhibit the flow of steam.

bThe f l o w rates a t 3 . 5 psig cover saturated pressure from 1 t o

6 ps ig , and the rates at 12 p s i g cover saturated pressurefrom 8 to 16 psig w i t h a n error not exceeding 8 percent.The steam velocities corresponding to the flow rates given i nthis table can be found from the basic chart and velocitymultiplier chart, Figure 11.

C

Reprinted by permission of ASH=, from ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals.

82



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~~~

BIL-HDBK-1003 /3 m 9999770 0273793 709 rn

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Table 11Return Main and Riser Capacities for Low-Pressure System, l b / h

- I1/32 pi 01 1/2 oz 1/24 pi.c 2/3oz 1/16 psi 01 101 I/t pri oc 2 OZ 114 pior 4 02 112 pdU I X

r e o fi oi.,)LI iao ci D ~ Pt r im n ~ m pcr lam 11 D~OP im n ~ m ptr la n

W'r( Dry V.C. wrl Dr) Vac. W d Dry Vac. Wcl Dr) Vac. WU Dry Vw. We t V r .Lr siZcID.

C H I S Y I. M N O P Q R S T U V W X i'

- - - - - 2 - - 100 - - 142 - - UK) - - 283/iI 125 62 - 145 71 143 175 SO 175 250 103 219 350 11 5 35 0 - - 4941% 213 130 - 148 149 244 xx) 168 Mo 425 217 426 600 241 600 - - 8481H 338 2M - 393 236 388 475 265 415 675 340 674 950 378 950 - - I340

2 700 470 - 810 53 52 % l i s o 760 - ISSO 868

3 18801460 - 2130 15601 .4 2750 1970 - 3 2xx)

4 3880 2930 - 4580 3350- - - - -- - - - -I :

I

81s loo0 575 iOW 1400 740 1420 2ooo 825 2oM) - - 2830

1360 1680 9% 1680 23H11230 2380 3350 1360 3350 - - 47M

2180 2680 1750 2680 3750 2250 3800 5350 2500 5350 - - 7560

3250 4Wû 2xx1 4OOO 5500 3230 5680 8ooo 3580 11ooo - - 1I.Mo4500 JxiO 3750 5 S 0 0 775Q 4830 7810 11,WO 380 11.OOO - - 1S.W

7880 . - - 9 6 8 0 - - 13.700 - - 19.400 - - 27.u)o

12600 - - 15.500 - - 22.m - - 3i.000 - - 43.800

JA - 48 - - 48 143 - 48 175 - 48 249 - 48 350 - - 494- 113 - - 113 244 - 113 30 0 11 3 426 - 113 600 - - 848L

1% - 248 - - U8 388 - 248 475 - 248 674 - 248 950 - - I340I 'ri - 37s - - 375 815 - 375 1,ooO - 375 1420 - 375 mo0 - 4 28302 - 7 5 0 - - 750 13M) - 750 1680 - 79 3 380 - 75 0 3350 - 4730

- - - - - 2180 - - 2680 - 3800 - - 5350 - - 7560

- - - - - 3250 - - - - so - - 8oOo - - 11,300

- - 50 0 - - 7810 - - ii,m - - 15,m- -448033 H

- 13,700 - - 19.400 - - 7,300- - - - - 7880 - - 6 8 0 -5 - - - - - 2.aoo - - l5.m - - 22.060 - - 31.000 - - 43.800

3 2H

- - -

- . . -I

Table 12Comparative Capacity of Steam Lines

at Various Pi t c he s for Steam and CondensateFlowing in 0pposite.üirections (From Laschober et al. 1966)-

'? -c'iyc- un. c- yu. crw- um. capœ. ya. C W - M#. C F - 1yn. c.pr- yn. c m w u

' I h Ik IH h. I l r J *. 4 h.

b b1L NY Vd. lß Vai. W Fi 1 b V A io V I *r W. äy V A

4.I 9 9D II 11.1 I 5 12.1 17 18.8 I9 17.3 22 191 14 2û.3 SI11.8 l i 13.9 14 l9.W I 7 21.4 3 3 .0 22 31.3 23 31.4 I6 1 . 1 J I

42.9 I 5 Y O 1s 68.8 24 11.3 .V 929 IO W.6 U 102.4 11 IIS.0 U

, w h o ( ~ . h : i m n 1

I.? n 4. 1 ' I I 1.7 I I 6.+ 14 7. 1 16 8.3 if 9.9 z? ias o

i91 I: m~ 16 11.0 19 37.1 2 u.0 24 *.a x. mo1 I I m.z u

! \dwii) m ¡i L C m ) n Ib h I


8 3



--`,,,,,`,`̀ ```,,,`,```,̀ ,```,,`-`- ,̀,`,,`,`,,`---



flIL-HDBK-L003/3 Hl 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273794 b L 5 118

Table 13

(For one-pipe or two-pipe systems in which condensateflows against t h e steam flow)

Steam Pipe Capacities fo r Low-Pressure Systems

Note: Steam at an average pressure of 1 p s i g i s used as a

a

b a s i c of c a l c u l a t i n g capacities.

Do not use Column B for pressure drops of less than 1/16 p s ipex 100 ft of equivalent run. Use Figure 10 or Table 13instead.

b D o not use Column D for pressure drops of less than 1/24 psiper 100 ft of equivalent run, except on sizes 3 in. and over.Use Figure 10 or Table 13 instead.P i t c h of horizontal runouts to risers and radiators should benot l e s s t h a n 4 in./ft.obtained, runouts over 8 E t in length should be one pipe sizelarger than called for in t h i s table.

C

Where this pitch cannot be

Reprinted by permission of ASHRAE, from ASH- Handbook, Fundamentals.

84



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



R

-

tL

saY-wa

i8

3wa

m

aa

W

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 E 7 7 7 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 7 7 5 5 5 3 rn

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

nted by permission of ASHRAE, from ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals.

r L 0 W RATE -POUNDS PER navR

Based on Moody,FrictionFactor where flow of condensate does notinhibit t h e flow of steam.

May be used for steam pressure from 23 to 37 p i g w i t h an errornot exceeding 8 percent.

Figure 18Chart for Flow Rate and Velocity of Steam in Schedule 40

Pipe Based on Saturation Pressure of 30 psig

85



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 H 9999970 02711796 478 ia

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


C L W RATE -POUNDS P f R MOVR

Based on Moody Fr i c t i o n Factor where flow of condensate does noti n h i b i t t he flow of steam.

May be used for steam pressure from 4 0 to 6 0 p s i g w i t h an er rornot exceeding 8 percent.

Figure 19Chart for Flow Rate and Velocity of Steam in Schedule 40

Pipe Based on Saturation Pressure of 50 p s i g

86



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~ ~

f l I L - HDBK- L 0 0 3 / 3 m w w w o u 2 7 1 7 9 7 3 2 4 mMIL-HDBK-1003/3


r L W M T C - P O W $ PCR ciovrr

Based on Moody Friction Factor where flow of condensate does notinhibit the flow of steam.

May be used for steam pressure from 85 to 120 psig w i t h an er ro rnot exceeding 8 percent.

Figure 20Chart for Flow R a t e and V e l o c i t y of Steam in Schedule 4 0


87



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

,̀ , , ̀

---



~~ ~~ ~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 111 9 9 9 7 9 7 0 027l1798 2 b 0 sl

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Reprinted by permission of ASHRAE, from ASH= Handbook, Fundamentals.

FLOW RATL -POW. -3 C t l l nouli

Based on Moody Friction Factor where flow of condensate does notinhibit the flow of steam.

Hay be used for steam pressure from 127 to 180 p s i g w i t han er ror not exceeding 8 percent.

Figure 21Chart f o r F l o w Rate and Velocity of Steam in Schedule 4 0


88


Not for Resale, 10/08/2010 09:05:03 MDTproduction or networking permitted without license fr om IHS

- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

`

, ` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



b) Do not use vacuum condensate returns. Since high pressure steam

is hotter than low pressure steam, provide adequate cooling legs of

uninsulated steam pipe or a length of finned radiation between the last steam

main takeoff and the drip assembly. Failure to do this will cause the hot

condensate to flash back into steam at the trap. Use vented flash tank as asolution. Refer to par. 7.3.3.5 for condensate pumps and flash tank.

7.3.3.2 Boiler. Refer to MIL-HDBK-1003/6.

7.3.3.3 Heat Exchanger. Refer to par. 7.2.2.5.

7.3.3.4 Steam Pressure Regulating Valves. See Figures 22 and 23 for piping

of steam pressure regulating assemblies, and note the following:

a) Sizing Pressure Regulating Valves

(1) Analyze flow required for maximum and minimum demand.

(2) Size the pressure regulating valve to handle peak flow.

This will generally result in a valve body that is smaller than inlet supplyline size.

(3) If there is a big turndown ratio between minimum and

maximum flow, consider using two regulator valves in parallel, perhaps sizedfor 30 percent and 70 percent of the flow. Consider to flip the settings sothat the small regulator pilot maintains optimum downstream pressure in the

summer and the big regulator pilot is the lead controller in the winter.

(4) Look at the manufacturer’s tables to see whether a two

stage assembly should be used with two regulators in series. Sometimes thisis done anyway for redundancy in low pressure installations; with the

downstream regulator controlling to 5 psi, and a upstream regulator set at 7

psi in case the downstream regulator cannot handle a flow surge.

b) Piping Pressure Regulating Valves

(i) Provide a bypass around the regulator with a globe valve

that has a tight shutoff seat. Size bypass to flow less than wide open

failure flow of the regulator, but not less than regulator design flow.

89



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, ,

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



1.2.

, 3 .4 .

: 5.

SERVICE PIPE FROM DISTRICT STEAM MAINSERVICE VALVEOPERATING VALVEMANUAL BYPASSPRESSURE REGULATING VALVE

PILOTBALANCE OR IMPULSE LINE, FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONSAFETY RELIEF VALVE, DISCHARGE OUTSIDE

Figure 2 2PRV-Low Pressure

90



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```, ,̀```,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDSK-3003/3 6 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 8 0 3 6 8 5 .I

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

1, SERVICE PIPE FROM DISTRICT STEAM MAIN2, SERVICE VALVE3. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE4. PILOT5. BALANCE LINE6. PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE7 , SAFETY RELIEF VALVE

8 . RELIEF VALVE DISCHARGE TO OUTSIDE9, BYPASS, ONE S I Z E SMALLER THAN PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

NOTE: ALL FITTINGS SHOULD BE AMERICAN STmDARD CLASS 250CAST IRON OR 300 LB STEEL.

Figure 23Two S t a g e PR V

91



--`,,,,,`,````̀ ,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 m! 9999970 0271802 511 rn

( 2 ) Put a pressure gage immediately downstream ofThe pressure gage range should includehe regulator pilot tap.

the upstream inlet pressure.

(3) Provide a relief valve on the downstream sidethat will handle 150 percent of the wide open failure flow ratingof the regulator. Set the relief valve higher than the

downstream operating pressure, and pipe the relief valvedischarge to a safe place.

(4) Provide shutoff valves on each side of theregulator assembly; with the low side shutoff valve downstream ofthe pilot tap.

( 5 ) Locate the entire regulator assembly in anaccessible place.

7.3.3.5 Condensate Pumps and Flash Tank. Higher pressure steamcondensate is hotter than low pressure steam condensate. If thesystem is over 40 psi steam, always run the condensate through aflash tank before entering the receiver of the condensate pumpset. This prevents the condensate flashing to steam in thepumps. See Figure 24.

7.3.3.6 Steam Coils - General. Refer to par. 7.2.2.2 and themanufacturer's capacity tables for selection. See Figures 25 and26 for piping steam coils.coil section. Steam distributing coils feature a perforateddistributing header inside the main coil construction.

Always provide steam traps for each

7.3.3.7 Steam Trans. In a steam system, steam traps should beprovided to remove condensate and gas from the steam supply assoon as it forms. Unless this is done:

a) A slug of condensate can harm the system.

b) Accumulation of CO gas can cause corrosion.

See Table 14 for common types of steam traps and Figure 27 forpiping of a low pressure drip.

7.3.4 Boilers. Size the steam boiler in accordance with theASHRAE Equipment Handbook, and include building heating, processsteam, domestic water heating, and pickup loads. See Figure 28for piping a low pressure steam boiler.

92



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 II 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273603 456 111

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

NOTE: Flash tank same size as condensate receiver. A l w a y suse a flash tank on 4 0 psi steam or over; ASME tanksrated at not less than 100 psi.

Figure 2 4

Detail - Flash Tank and Duplex Condensate Pump Unit

93



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 111 9999970 027ll804 394 IB

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

NOTE: Less than 1000 pounds steam per hour

Figure 25

Steam C o i l s

94



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,̀ ,```,,`-`- ,̀,`,,`,`,,`---



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 11111 9999970 027llf105 2 2 0 mMIL-HDBK-1003/3

Figure 26Steam Tempering C o i l s

9 5



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



TYPE

Bellows

BimetallicThermos at

Float andThermostatic

Inverted

Bucket

Table 14

Common Types of Steam Traps

APPLICATION

Steady light loads in low pressure steam.

Radiators, converters, etc.

High pressure steam where some condensate

backup is tolerable; Steam tracing, jacketed

piping, heat transfer equipment, etc.

Low pressure steam on temperature regulated

coils; drips on steam mains; other large loads

that vary where you cannot tolerate condensate

backup.

High and low pressure steam. W A C and drips

on steam mains.

Figure 27

Low Pressure Drip

96



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



- -STOP VALVE

PIESSURE GAUGE

PRESSURE CONTROLS

SAFETY VALVE

OAUGE =ASS

HARTFORD LOOP LOW WATER CUTOFF

2'-4"8ElOW

WATER LINE

CHECK VALVE

-

7.3.5 Freezing of Steam Coils - General. Care should be taken in bothdesign and construction of systems with steam heating coils to prevent coilfreeze-up. TWO primary causes of coil freeze-up are: (1) stratification ofthe air entering the coil due to poor mixing of outside air and return air,

and ( 2 ) buildup of condensate in the coil. While it is virtually impossible

to design a system with freeze-proof coils, careful consideration in thefollowing areas could air in minimizing coil freezing problems.

7.3.5.1 Freezing Due to Air Stratification. See Figure 29. In general,outside air and return air are mixed in proportions that will provide an

average mixed air temperature above freezing. However, if the outside air andreturn air streams are not thoroughly mixed, stratification of air can occuracross the coil.

sub-freezing air contacts the coil and can cause freezing.

taken when locating the steam coil and designing the

This condition results in localized cold spots where

Care should be

97



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

mixing chamber to ensure proper mixing of outside air and returnair.poorly designed for mixing of outside and return air and oneproperly designed to promote mixing of outside and return air.

Figure 2 9 contains a sketch of a mixing plenum which is

7 . 3 . 5 . 2Freezina Due to Buildux,of Condensate in the Coil. See

Figure 3 0 for coil piping to prevent freezing.number of oversights in design and installation that can lead tobuildup of condensate in a steam coil.primarily fall into the following categories:

There are a

These oversights

a) Inappropriate Coil Selection. Many coil designspromote steam short circuiting - a phenomenon where steam takesthe path of least resistance through coil tubes that have theleast condensate flow. This increases the coil return headerpressure to the point where the condensate in other coil tubescannot drain properly.

minimize problems like this. The single row distribution tubeand multi-row series flow coils minimize the potential forshort-circuiting and trapping condensate inside the coil. Thesecoil designs should be considered when designing a system wherethere is substantial risk of coil freezing.

Coil designs have been developed to help

b) Improper Installation. Even though the proper coilis selected, where the coil is not installed properly, freezingcan still occur. Many coils are installed in such a way thatgravity drainage is not possible. Though initially installedproperly, coils can move into an undesirable position throughbuilding settling or weakening of supports.coil installations with these problems in mind can help avoidproblems in this area.

Closely inspecting

c) Improper Venting, Vacuum Elimination, and SteamTrapping Practices. If a coil is not designed for proper ventingof noncondensables, vacuum elimination, and condensate removal, awell selected and installed coil can still experience problemswith condensate buildup. Consider carefully proper steam pipingpractices in these areas and consult available Navy and industryguidance.

d) Modulating Valves. Avoid using modulating valvesfor control of preheat coils.

e) Traps. Trap each coil separately. Coils seldomhave equal pressure drops.



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,`

,̀ ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



/- DAMPEROUTDOOR AtR

I I COL FAN

RETURN AIR

POOROUTDOOR AIR

DAMPER

RETURN A1R

BETTER

Figure 2 9Air Stratification to Coil During Freeze-Up Conditions

99



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 W 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273810 698 LI

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Notes:1.

2.3 .4 .

5 .

6.7 .

8 .

Ensure dry steam into the coil by dripping the main at thecoil takeoff.Use gate valves for minimum obstruction of flow,Use a two-position control valve to ensure full steam flow.Provide vacuum breakers to ensure condensate flow throughthe coil.Use float and thermostatic traps to avoid condensate backup.Locate traps a t least 12 inches below coil. U s e dual trapsin case one s t i c k s .

Run condensate i n t o a separate vented receiver.Thermostatic air vent valve run discharge into receivervent.Provide strainers with blowdown valves immediately beforeeach steam control valve and condensate t rap assembly.Provide isolation gate valves immediately after eachcondensate trap assembly.

Figure 30Nonfreeze C o i l Piping

100



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



7.3.6 Refriaerant Pipinq

7.3.6.1 General. This military handbook covers only directexpansion systems for W A C systems. There is an entire ASHRAEHandbook devoted to food and industrial refrigeration.

Refrigerant piping is slightly different from other pipingbecause refrigerant gas is difficult to contain, so that specialfittings (wrought copper or forged brass) and high melting pointsolder (1,000degrees F) are needed to achieve a tight system,

and provision must be made to ensure oil return to thecompressor.

7.3.6.2 Sizinq. See the ASHRAE Handbook, Refriseration forflow rate charts on sizing the liquid, suction, and hot gas lineswith various refrigerants.

7.3.6.3 Arranaement. See Figures 31 and 32 for refrigerant

piping arrangement.

101



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



E X P A " VANE

ciuss

INO SCALE

Figure 31Refrigerant Coil

102



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 H 9999970 0273813 3 T 7 111

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

w4JBLERIsLFIHotßAsptewJoStZ€ SMALL R I M R FOR 1000 PPM

M GASGOES toCONDENSER AN D FIECEIVEñ

(FROM EVAPORATECI)

co1i3pREssa3

Figure 32Compressor Piping

103



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

`

- ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~ ~

M I L -H D B K -L 0 0 3 / 3 m 9 9 9 9 3 7 0 0273834 233 8

Section 8: CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

8.1 General Reauirements. See pars. 2 . 2 . 6 and 2.2.8 for anoverview of temperature controls and instrumentation. Anothersource of assistance that the designer may use is NFESC, Code

ESC23 at Port Hueneme, California. NFESC is a Navy organizationthat has expertise in direct digital control (DDC) applications.

8.1.1 Choice of Controls. DDC is the control system ofchoice for WA C systems.and major renovation projects. Older conventional controlsystems may be specified for small buildings where DDC is notcost effective or where the customer refuses to accept DDC.of pneumatic controllers is discouraged because of the highmaintenance required to keep them functional.operators may be reused, if in good operating condition, as part

of a hybrid system with DDC sensors and controllers and the

pneumatic operators.

Consider the advantages of DDC for new

Use

Existing pneumatic

8.1.1.1 A Guide to Choose Control Svstems. Consider thefollowing when selecting the type of control system (digital,

electric, analog electronic, or pneumatic):

a) Life cycle cost. In most cases, DDC will be thelowest cost on a life cycle cost basis. The first cost of DDC andconventional control systems may be comparable but DDC operatingand maintenance costs are significantly lower.

b) Customer preference of control type. The customer

may feel that his personnel are better qualified to operate andmaintain a particular type control system. Repair parts may be

an important consideration.

8.1.1.2 Factors to Select Control Svstems. Control selectionmay be determined by several factors as follows:

a) DDC systems use stand-alone digital controllers,distributed throughout the building to provide control of W A Cfunctions.controllers, thermostats, switches, relays, and auxiliarydevices.which performs the control logic in software, and outputs a

control signal directly to the actuator or relay. Terminal

control units control individual terminal WA C equipment, such as

VAV boxes, fan coil units, and heat pumps. Distributed controlrefers to locating the digital controllers near the equipmentbeing controlled.

The digital controller replaces conventional receiver

Sensors are wired directly to the digital controller,

104



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, ,

̀---



MIL-HDBK-L003 /3 î î ï ï ï 7 0 02718L5 L 7 T

b) DDC systems require less maintenance thanconventional control systems. With a personal controller (PC)interface workstation, W A C mechanics can quickly troubleshootHVAC problems.systems by providing accurate sensing, maintaining setpoints, andoperating in the designed sequence.

DDC systems efficiently operate building W A C

c) One disadvantage of DDC is that DDC systems fromdifferent manufacturers have different operating systems whichare proprietary and will not communicate with each other. Insome cases, this makes competitive bids for additions difficult.

d) Consider specifying DDC in the followingsituations:

(1) In most new construction,

(2) In a major retrofit of W A C systems,

(3) When complex or numerous HVAC systems areincluded in the design,

( 4 ) In buildings over 2 0 , 0 0 0 square feet,

( 5 ) When remote or local workstation monitoringand troubleshooting of HVAC equipment is desired, and

(6) When the customer desires DDC.

e) Acceptance of DDC by the user's operation andmaintenance personnel is extremely important. if not soaccepted, DDC should not be specified. The project managershould directly contact station personnel to make thisdetermination of acceptance.

f) Consider conventional electric, analog electronic,or pneumatic control systems when the following apply:

(1) Small buildings where DDC is not costeffective,

(2)

(3) When the customer or maintenance will not

When package air handling units are specified,and

support DDC.

8.1.2 Desisnina DDC Svstems. Design DDC systems using thefollowing guidance:

105



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```, ,̀```,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 I ï ï ï ï 7 0 027LBLb 006 !M

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

a) Keep the input and output points to the minimum

Follow the recommended point guidance provided innumber required for HVAC control and efficient buildingoperation.par. 8.2. Follow the principle to "Keep it Simple.''

b) Use standard control sequences for similar HVACcontrol system applications.

c) Show the following on control drawings as aminimum:

(1) Flow diagram schematic of each mechanicalsystem showing sensors, equipment, and operators.

(2) Individual point list description for eachmechanical system.

( 3 ) Electrical ladder diagram for each electricalcircuit controlled.

(4) Operating parameters - controller setpointsand time schedules.

(5) Detailed sequence of operation.

d) Use direct connection of temperature sensors whenpossible. Use only precision thermistors (10,000ohms) for roomsensing and 1000 ohm platinum RTDs for W A C unit sensing.

e) Use room zone temperature sensors with pushbuttonoverride and setpoint adjustment integral to the sensor.

f) Do not modify the chiller microprocessor systemsupplied with the equipment. Control and safety functions shouldbe the chiller manufacturer's responsibility. The DDC systemshould only enable or disable the chiller, chilled water pump,condenser water pump, and in some cases chilled water andcondenser water reset. For chillers 150 tons and larger, providean RS-485 communication between the chiller microprocessor andthe DDC system.

g) Do not modify the boiler microprocessor systemsupplied with the equipment. Control and safety functions shouldbe the boiler manufacturer's responsibility.systems to maintain the boiler manufacturer's minimum temperature

required to meet the building's requirements.

Design hot water

when in operation but vary the hot water supply temperature as

106



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

h) Connect steam, high temperature hot water, gas, andelectric meters to the DDC for remote monitoring of energy use ofthe building.

8.2 Standard Semences of ODerations

8 . 2 . 1 General Recniirements. These requirements shall applyto primary W A C systems unless modified herein.describe actions of the control system in one direction of changein the W A C process analog variable, such as temperature,humidity, or pressure. The reverse sequence shall occur whendirection of change is reversed unless specifically modified.

The sequences

8 .2 .2 ODeration of WA C Svstem. Equipment shall be operatedin the optimized start, occupied, or unoccupied modes.

a) The optimized start mode energizes the equipment at

maximum capacity at the latest time required for heating up (orcooling down) the space to normal occupied temperatureconditions.

b) The occupied mode maintains the occupied conditionsunder all load variations while providing required ventilation.Supply fan operates continuously.

c) The unoccupied mode cycles the equipment tomaintain a minimum heating temperature (or a maximum coolingtemperature) in the space while providing no ventilation.

8.2.3 ODeration of Outside Air, Return Air, and Exhaust(Relief) Air DamDers

a) Optimized Start Mode: Outside air and exhaust airdampers are closed and return air dampers are opened.

b) Occupied Mode: Outside air dampers are opened tothe minimum ventilation air position. If an economizer outsideair cycle is provided, the outside air, return air, and exhaustair dampers are automatically controlled.bulb sensor disables the economizer cycle and maintains minimum

ventilation air when the outside air dry bulb temperature exceedsthe changeover point.

A n outdoor air dry

c) Unoccupied Mode: Outside air and exhaust airdampers are closed and return air dampers are opened.

8 .2 .4 ODeration of Filtration Svstem. Differential pressuresensor measuring static pressure drop across the filter shallinitiate alarm when pressure drop exceeds recommended value.

107



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,`

, ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

8.2.5 ODeration of Freeze Protection. A freezestat with anextended surface sensing element, located ahead of the chilledwater coil, shall stop the supply fan, return system componentsto their fail-safe position, and initiate a low-temperature alarmif the temperature at any point of the sensing element fallsbelow the setpoint.freezing condition is corrected and the freezestat is manuallyreset.

Normal operation will occur only after the

8.2 .6 ODeration of Smoke Detectors. Duct type smokedetectors located in the supply fan discharge air duct and in thereturn air duct (as required by NFPA ) shall stop the supply fan,return system components to their fail-safe position, and shallactivate the smoke alarm if either detector senses the presenceof smoke. Normal operation will occur only after the smoke iscleared and the detector(s) is manually reset.

8.2.7 ODeration of Chilled Water Coil Discharae Control. Adry bulb temperature sensor located in the chilled water coildischarge air shall, on a rise in temperature, first, graduallyclose the preheat coil valve, next, gradually open the outsideair damper from its minimum ventilation air position whilesimultaneously gradually close the return air damper (ensurethorough mixing) and gradually opening the exhaust air damper,and then gradually open the chilled water coil valve. An outdoorair dry bulb sensor disables the economizer cycle and maintainsminimum ventilation air when outside air dry bulb temperatureexceeds the changeover point.

8.2.8 ODeration of Preheat Coil Control. (Where required byoutdoor design temperatures and ventilation air requirements.)A dry bulb temperature low limit sensor located in the mixed air(ensure thorough mixing) shall, on a fall in temperature,gradually open the preheat coil valve. Primary control shall besequenced by the chilled water coil discharge sensor or supplyair sensor.

8.2.9 ODeration of Heatina Coil Control. A dry bulbtemperature sensor located in the heating coil discharge airshall, on a rise in dry bulb air temperature, gradually close the

heating coil valve.

8.2.10 Ooeration of SDace Control (Sinale Zone Unit). A roomtype dry bulb temperature sensor located in the most criticalspot shall, on a rise in dry bulb temperature in the space, firstgradually close the heating coil valve, next gradually close thepreheat coil valve, then gradually open the outside air damperfrom its minimum ventilation air position while simultaneouslygradually close the return air damper (ensure thorough mixing)

108



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

and gradually opening the exhaust air damper, and finallygradually open the chilled water coil valve. A dry bulbtemperature low limit sensor located in the mixed air (ensurethorough mixing) shall, on a fall in temperature, gradually openthe preheat coil valve. An outdoor air dry bulb sensor disablesthe economizer cycle and maintains minimum ventilation air whenoutside air dry bulb temperature exceeds the changeover point.

8.2.11 Operation of Space Control (Multizone Unit). A roomtype dry bulb temperature sensor located in the most criticalspot shall, on a rise in dry bulb temperature in the space,gradually open the cold deck damper while simultaneouslygradually close the hot deck damper.

8.2.12 Operation of Wace Control (VAV Terminal Unit -Pressure Dependent). A room type dry bulb temperature sensorlocated in the most critical spot shall, on a rise in dry bulb

temperature in the space, gradually open the VAV terminal boxcold air valve.

8.2.13 Operation of Sumlv Duct Pressure Control. A supplyduct static pressure sensor located two-thirds the distance fromthe fan of the length of the longest supply duct run shall, on arise in static pressure, gradually reduce the speed of theelectric motor variable speed drive and close the fan vortexdamper. A high-limit duct static pressure sensor located at thefan discharge shall override the supply duct static pressuresensor to limit pressures to design values.

8.3 Sinale Zone Unit Semence of Operations (Sample). SeeFigure 33 and Table 15.

a) General: Sequences describe actions of the controlsystem in one direction of change in the W A C process analogvariable, such as temperature, humidity, or pressure. Reversesequence shall occur when direction of change is reversed unlessspecifically modified.

b) Optimized Start Mode: Energize equipment at

maximum capacity at the latest time required for heating up (or

cooling down) the space to normal occupied temperatureconditions. Outside air and exhaust air dampers are closed andreturn air dampers are opened.

c) Occupied Mode: Maintain occupied conditions underload variations while providing required ventilation.operates continuously.minimum ventilation air position. If an economizer outside aircycle is provided, the outside air, return air, and exhaust air

Supply fanOutside air dampers are opened to the

109



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



~

MIL-HDSK-1003/3 E 9999970 0273820 537 H

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

dampers are automatically controlled.sensor disables the economizer cycle and maintains minimumventilation air when outside air dry bulb temperature exceeds thechangeover point.

An outdoor air dry bulb

d) Unoccupied Mode: Cycle the equipment to maintainminimum heating temperature (or maximum cooling temperature) inthe space while providing no ventilation. Outside air andexhaust air dampers are closed and return air dampers are opened.

e) Maintenance and Safety Mode: A differentialpressure sensor measuring static pressure drop across the filtershall initiate an alarm when the pressure drop exceeds therecommended value.

A freezestat with extended surface sensing elementlocated ahead of the chilled water coil shall stop the supply

fan, return system components to their fail-safe position, andinitiate a low-temperature alarm if the temperature at any pointof the sensing element falls below the setpoint. Normaloperation shall occur only after the freezing condition iscorrected and the freezestat is manually reset.

f) Room Control Mode: A room type dry bulbtemperature sensor located in the most critical spot shall, on arise in dry bulb temperature in the space, first gradually closethe heating coil valve, next gradually close the preheat coilvalve, then gradually open the outside air damper from itsminimum ventilation air position while simultaneously gradually

close the return air damper (ensure thorough mixing) andgradually opening the exhaust air damper, and finally graduallyopen the chilled water coil valve. A dry bulb temperature lowlimit sensor located in the mixed air (ensure thorough mixing)shall, on a fall in temperature, gradually open the preheat coilvalve. A dry bulb temperature low limit sensor located in thesupply air shall, on a fall in temperature, gradually open theheating coil valve.economizer cycle and maintains minimum ventilation air whenoutside air dry bulb temperature exceeds the changeover point.

A n outdoor air dry bulb sensor disables the

8.4 Multizone Unit Semence of ODeration (Sample). SeeFigure 34 and Table 16.

a) General: Sequences describe actions of the controlsystem in one direction of change in the WAC process analogvariable, such as temperature, humidity, or pressure. Reversesequence shall occur when direction of change is reversed unlessspecifically modified.

110



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~

RI L - HDBK- 1 0 0 3 / 3 = 9 7 7 7 7 7 0 0273821 473 mMIL-HDBK-1003/3

2TS-XXO4

PPXXOI

I

Figure 3 3Control System Schematic for Single Zone W A C System XX

111



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 II 9999970 0 2 7 1 8 2 2 30 T 111

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

LUTCHINE

o'ØlfB I

2 r v

TS-XXû2

LOCATED INRoou)(xX-l

F i g u r e 33 (Continued)Control System Schematic for S i n g l e Zone W A C System XX

112



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 I îîîî70 027L823 2 4 b Ri

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Table 15Equipment f o r Single Zone WA C Control System XX

LOOP CONTROLFUNCTION

ROOM ZONETEMPERATURE

SAFETY &

MAINTENANCE

DEVICENUMBER

DA-XXO1,02, 03- -

TS-XXO1

VLV-XXo1

TS-XXO2VLV-XXo2

VLV-XXO3

TS-XX03

TSL-XXO1

SD-XXO1

SD-XXO2

DP-XXO1

DEVICE ADDITIONALFUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE PARAMETERS

DAMPER -- 4-20 ma MIN.0.A.ACTUATOR X X X X CFMOUTDOOR AIR 65' F - - SOFTWAREDB HI LIMIT POINTMIXED AIR 55' F 30-130" F - -LOW LIMITTEMPERATURESENSOR

PREHEAT COIL - - 4-20 ma CV-10VALVE CLOSE

AGAINST

16 PSIGSUPPLY AIR 55' F 40-140" F - -HEATING COIL - - 4-20 ma CV-12VALVE CLOSE

AGAINST16 PSIG

COOLING COIL - - 4-20 ma CV-20VALVE CLOSE

AGAINST20 PSIG

ROOM ZONE H-70' F 50-100" F WITH

TEMPERATURE C-76" F SETPOINT

SENSOR N-55' F ADJUST-MENT &

OVERRIDESWITCH

LOW 35' FTEMPERATUREPROTECTIONTHERMOSTATSUPPLY AIR --SMOKE DETECTORRETURN AIR - -

SMOKE DETECTORFILTER STATUS 0.5DIFFERENTIAL W.GPRESSURE

--

- -

--

IN. 0-2W.G

113



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

`

` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



Table 15 (Continued)Equipment for Single Zone W A C Control System XX

LOOP CONTROL DEVICE DEXICE ADDITIONALFUNCTION NUMBER FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE PARAMETERS

SAFETY & TS-XX04 RETURN AIR - -MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE(CONT D) SENSORSUPPLY FAN R-XXO 1 SUPPLY FAN --

START RELAY

CURRENT SENSORCS-XXO1 SUPPLY FAN --

50-100° F - -

114



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 E 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273825 O39 H

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Q II

Figure 34Control System Schematic for Multizone HVAC System XX

115



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273826 T5.5

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

5

IY

3

Figure 3 4 (Continued)Control System Schematic f o r MultiZone HVAC System XX

Table 16

Equipment for MultiZone W A C Control System XX

LOOP CONTROL DEVICE DEVICE

FUNCTION NUMBER FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGEADD T NAL

PARAMETERS

COLD DECKTEMPERATURE

DA-mol, DAMPER -- 4-20 ma MIN.O .A.

- - OUTDOOR AIR 65 deg F -- SOFTWARE

TS-XXO1 MIXED AIR

LOW LIMIT

TEMPERATURE

SENSOR

02, 03 ACTUATOR xxxx cm

DB HI LIMIT POINT55 deg F 30-130 deg F --

116



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



Table 16 (Continued)Equipment for Multizone HVAC Control System XX


COLD DECKTEMPERATURE(CONT D)

HOT DECKTEMPERATURE

ROOM SENSORS(MULTIPLE

SAFETY &

MAINTENANCE

DEVICENUMBER

VLV-XXo1

TS-XXO2

VLV-no2

TS-XX03

VLV-XXO3

TS-XX04

DA-XXO4

TSL-XXO1

SD-XXO1

SD-XX02

DP-XXO1

TS-XX04

DEVICE ADDITIONALFUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE PARAMETERS

PREHEAT COIL - - 4-20 ma CV-10VALVE CLOSE

AGAINST16 PSIG

COLD DECK 55' F 40-140" F --

TEMPERATURESENSORCOOLING COIL - - 4-20 ma CV-20VALVE CLOSE

AGAINST

20 PSIGHOT DECK 180" F 40-240" FTEMPERATURESENSORHEATING COIL - -

VALVE

ROOM H-70'TEMPERATURE C-76"SENSORS N-55"

ZONE DAMPER --ACTUATORSLOW 35" FTEMPERATUREPROTECTIONTHERMOSTAT

SMOKE DETECTOR

SMOKE DETECTOR

SUPPLY AIR - -

RETURN AIR - -

4-20 ma

F 50-100"FF

4-20 ma

- -

cv-12CLOSEAGAINST16 PSIG

SETPOINTADJUST-MENT &

OVERRIDESWITCHONE PERZONE

F WITH

- -

FILTER STATUS 0.5 IN. 0-2 IN. --DIFFERENTIAL W.G. W.G.PRESSURERETURN AIR - -

TEMPERATURESENSOR

5 0 - 1 0 0 ' F - -

117



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~~ ~~ ~

MIL-HBBK-3003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273828 8 2 8 m

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Table 16 (Continued)Equipment for Multizone WA C Control System XX

LOOP CONTROL DEVICE DEVICE ADDITIONALFUNCTION NUMBER FUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE PARAMETERS

SAFETY & TS-XX04 RETURN AIR - - 5 0 - 1 0 0 ° F --MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE(CONT DSUPPLY FAN R-XXO1 SUPPLY FAN - -

CS-XXOI SUPPLY FAN - -

SENSOR

START RELAY

CURRENT SENSOR

- - - -

-- - -

I


maximum capacity at the latest time required for heating up (orcooling down) the space to normal occupied temperatureconditions. Outside air and exhaust air dampers are closed andreturn air dampers are opened.

allfanmini

c) Occupied Mode: Maintain occupied conditions underload variations while providing required ventilation.operates continuously..mum ventilation air position. If an economizer outside air

cycle is provided, the outside air, return air, and exhaust airdampers are automatically controlled.sensor disables the economizer cycle and maintains minimumventilation air when outside air dry bulb temperature exceeds thechangeover point.

SupplyOutside air dampers are opened to the

An outdoor air dry bulb

d) Unoccupied Mode: Cycle the equipment to maintainminimum heating temperature (or maximum cooling temperature) inthe space while providing no ventilation. Outside air andexhaust air dampers are closed and return air dampers are opened.

e) Maintenance and Safety Mode: A differentialpressure sensor measuring static pressure drop across the filter,shall initiate an alarm when the pressure drop exceeds the

recommended value.

A freezestat with extended surface sensing elementlocated ahead of the chilled water coil shall stop the supplyfan, return system components to their fail-safe position, andinitiate a low-temperature alarm if the temperature at any point

118



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~ ~~~~

M I L - H D B K - L 0 0 3 / 3 E 9999970 0273829 764

of the sensing element falls below the setpoint.operation will occur only after the freezing condition iscorrected and the freezestat is manually reset.

Normal

f ) Chilled Water Coil Discharge Air Mode: A dry bulbtemperature sensor located in the chilled water coil discharge

air shall, on a rise in temperature, first gradually close thepreheat coil valve, next gradually open the outside air damperfrom its minimum ventilation air position while simultaneouslygradually close the return air damper (ensure thorough mixing)and gradually open the exhaust air damper, and then graduallyopen the chilled water coil valve. A dry bulb temperature lowlimit sensor located in the mixed air (ensure thorough mixing)shall, on a fall in temperature, gradually open the preheat coilvalve. An outdoor air dry bulb sensor disables the economizercycle and maintains minimum ventilation air when outside air drybulb temperature exceeds the changeover point.

g) Heating Coil Discharge Air Mode: A dry bulbtemperature sensor located in the heating coil discharge airshall, on a rise in dry bulb air temperature, gradually close theheating coil valve.

h) Room Control Mode: A room type dry bulbtemperature sensor located in the most critical spot shall, on arise in dry bulb temperature in the space, gradually open thecold deck damper while simultaneously gradually close the hotdeck damper.

8.5 Variable Air Volume (VAV) Unit Seauence of ODeration(Sample). See Figure 35 and Table 17.

a) General: Sequences describe actions of the controlsystem in one direction of change in the WA C process analogvariable, such as temperature, humidity, or pressure. Reversesequence shall occur when direction of change is reversed unlessspecifically modified.


maximum capacity at the latest time required for heating up (or

cooling down) the space to normal occupied temperatureconditions. Outside air and exhaust air dampers are closed andreturn air dampers are opened.units shall start.

Fans of series type VAV terminal

c) Occupied Mode: Maintain occupied conditions underall load variations while providing required ventilation.fan operates continuously.minimum ventilation airflow by the air monitoring unit for all

SupplyOutside air dampers are opened to the

119



--` , , , ,

,̀ ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 Ri 9 7 9 7 9 7 0 0271630 4öb m

values of supply fan flow. If an economizer outside air cycle isprovided, the outside air, return air, and exhaust air dampersare automatically controlled. An outdoor air dry bulb sensordisables the economizer cycle and maintains minimum ventilationair when the outside air dry bulb temperature exceeds the

changeover point. Fans of series type VAV terminal units shallrun continuously.

d) Unoccupied Mode: Cycle the VAV terminal units atmaximum heating capacity to maintain minimum heating temperaturein the space while providing no ventilation. Outside air andexhaust air dampers are closed and return air dampers are opened.

e) Maintenance and Safety Mode: A differentialpressure sensor measuring static pressure drop across the filtershall initiate an alarm when the pressure drop exceeds therecommended value.

A freezestat with extended surface sensing elementlocated ahead of the chilled water coil shall stop the supplyfan, return system components to their fail-safe position, andinitiate a low-temperature alarm if the temperature at any pointof the sensing element falls below the setpoint. Normaloperation will occur only after the freezing condition iscorrected and the freezestat is manually reset.

f) Supply Fan Discharge Air Mode: A dry bulbtemperature sensor located in the supply air fan discharge airshall, on a rise in temperature, first gradually close the

preheat coil valve, next gradually open the outside air damperfrom its minimum ventilation air position while simultaneouslygradually close the return air damper (ensure thorough mixing)and gradually open the exhaust air damper, and then graduallyopen the chilled water coil valve. A dry bulb temperature low

limit sensor located in the mixed air (ensure thorough mixing)shall, on a fall in temperature, gradually open the preheat coilvalve. An outdoor air dry bulb sensor disables the economizercycle and maintains minimum ventilation air when the outside airdry bulb temperature exceeds the changeover point.

g) Supply Duct Static Pressure Mode: A supply ductstatic pressure sensor located two-thirds the distance from thefan of the length of the longest supply duct run shall, on a risein static pressure, gradually reduce the speed of the electricmotor variable speed drive and close the fan vortex damper. Ahigh-limit duct static pressure sensor located at the fandischarge shall override the supply duct static pressure sensorto limit pressures to design values.

120



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~

M I L - H D B K - I 0 0 3 / 3 m w m 7 0 o z ~ 1 ~ 3 112 mMIL-HDBK-1003/3

r

Figure 3 5Control System Schematic for VAV W A C System XX

121



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



I

M-

E ni

Figure 35 (Continued)

Control System Schematic for VAV HVAC System XX

122



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 IBI 9 9 7 9 9 7 0 0273833 1 9 5 =MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Table 17Equipment for VAV HVAC Control System XX


SUPPLY AIRTEMPERATURE

SUPPLY DUCTSTATICPRESSURE

SAFETY &

MAINTENANCE

DEVICENUMBER

DA-XXO1,02, 03AMU-xxo1

- -

TS-XXO1

nv-xx0l

TS-XX02

VLV-xxo2

PS-no1

PS-xxo2

SFC-XXO1

TSL-XXO1

DEVICEFUNCTION SETPOINT

ADDITIONALRANGE PARAMETERS

- -AMPERACTUATORAIR MONI- - -

TORING UNITOUTDOOR AIR 65' FDB HI LIMITMIXED AIR 55' FLOW LIMITTEMPERATURESENSOR

PREHEAT COIL --VALVE

SUPPLY AIR 55' FFAN DISCHARGETEMPERATURESENSORCOOLING COIL - -VALVE

- --20 ma

MIN. O.A.X X X X CFMSOFTWAREPOINT

- -

- -

30-130" F --

4-20 ma CV-10CLOSEAGAINST16 PSIG

40-140" F --

4-20 ma CV-20CLOSEAGAINST20 PSIG

SUPPLY DUCT 1.5 IN. 0-5 IN. - -STATIC W.G. W.G.PRESSURESENSOR

HIGH LIMIT W.G. W.G.STATICPRESSURESENSOR

FAN DISCHARGE 3.5 IN. 0-5 IN. --

4-20 maUPPLY FAN --VARIABLE SPEEDCONTROLLERLOW 35" F - -TEMPERATUREPROTECTIONTHERMOSTAT

123



- - ` , ,

, , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~ ~

flIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9 9 9 7 9 7 0 0274834 o 2 4 BI

Table 17 (Continued)Equipment for VAV W A C Control System XX

LOOP CONTROL DEVICEFUNCTION NUMBER

SAFETY & SD-XXO1MAINTENANCE(CONT D) SD-XX02

DP-XXO1

TS-XX04

SUPPLY FAN R-XXOl

cs-XXo1

ROOM SENSORS TS-XX04(MULTIPLE)

DA-XXO4

VLV-XXO3

R-XX02

DEVICE ADD1 IONALFUNCTION SETPOINT RANGE PARAMETERS

- - - -UPPLY AIR --SMOKE DETECTORRETURN AIR - -

SMOKE DETECTORFILTER STATUS 0.5 IN. 0-2 IN. --DIFFERENTIAL W.G. W.G.PRESSURE

RETURN AIR -- 50-100' F --TEMPERATURESENSORSUPPLY FAN - -

START RELAYSUPPLY FAN - -

CURRENT SENSORROOM H-70' F 50-100' F WITHTEMPERATURE C-76' F SETPOINTSENSORS N-55O F ADJUST-

- - --

-- --

- - - -

MENT &

OVERRIDESWITCH

VAV TERMINAL -- 4-20 ma ONE PERBOX COLD AIR ZONE

VALVEVAV HEATING -- 4-20 ma CV VARIESCOIL VALVE CLOSE

AGAINST16 PSIG

VAV TERMINAL -- -- - -

BOX FAN STARTRELAY

h) Room Control Mode: A room type dry bulbtemperature sensor located in the most critical spot shall, on arise in dry bulb temperature in the space, gradually open the VAVterminal box cold air valve.

8.6 Commissionins Procedures

8.6.1 Functional Performance Test. Participate in thefunctional performance test as described in ASHRAE Guideline 1.

124



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,`

-` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Verify and document the performance of the control system asrequired by the Commissioning Plan prepared by the CommissioningAuthority.valves shall be marked on the device. Permanently record, onsystem equipment schedule, the final setting of controllerproportional, integral, and derivative constant settings in unitsand terminology specific to the controller. This will becomepart of the OLM manual.

Final positions of manual balancing dampers and

8.6.2 Preparation for Acceotance Testinq. Execute a detailedstatic and functional checkout procedure to ensure that systemsare ready for functional performance testing.

8.6.3 Svstem Static Checkout

8.6.3.1 Observation. Provide a detailed inspection to assurethat all equipment is properly mounted, sensors are properly

installed and connected, control devices are properly installed,and controllers and control devices are properly connected.

8.6.3.2 Calibration. Check, verify, and calibrate all sensorsincluding those sensors that are "factory calibrated." Perform atwo-point accuracy check of the calibration of each W A C controlsystem sensing element by comparing the WA C controller readoutto the actual value of the variable measured at the sensingelement or airflow measurement station location.indicating test instruments, such as digital thermometers,motor-driven psychrometers, and tachometers. Test instrumentsshall be at least twice as accurate as the specified sensing

element-to-controller readout accuracy. Calibration of testinstruments shall be traceable to National Institute of Standardsand Technology (NIST) standards. In the shutdown condition,calibration checks shall verify that the sensing element-to-controller readout accuracies at two points are within thespecified product accuracy tolerances. If not, re-calibrate orreplace the inaccurate device and repeat the calibration check.

Use digital

a) Check insertion temperature and immersiontemperature sensing element and transmitter-to-controller readoutcalibration accuracy at one physical location along the axis of

the sensing element.

b) Check averaging temperature sensing element andtransmitter-to-controller readout calibration accuracy every 2feet along the axis of the sensing element in the proximity ofthe sensing element, for a maximum of 10 readings.these readings.

Then average

125



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 I 999970 027Lâ3b 9 T 4 I

c)instrument as close as possible to the sensor to measureidentical conditions.to ensure achieving stable conditions.

Verify space type sensors by placing the test

Maintain the test for a sufficient length

8.6.3.3 ODeration

a) Each controller shall be configured for itsspecified service. Verify each sequence of operation for eachW A C system and subsystem. Verify that each controlled deviceresponds to the proper controller, in the proper manner, and atthe proper time. Verify the fail-safe position for eachcomponent of the system.

b) Set the time schedule of controllers in accordancewith the sequence of operation and the established time schedule.

8.6.4 Svstem Dvnamic Checkout. Perform weather-dependenttest procedures that cannot be performed by simulation in theappropriate climatic season. When simulation is used, verify theactual results in the appropriate season.

a) Use the controllers' manual-automatic switches asthe means of manipulating control devices such as dampers andvalves to check operation and to effect stable conditions, priorto making measurement checks.

b) Perform a controller tuning procedure, which shallconsist of setting the initial proportional, integral, and

derivative (PID) mode constants, controller setpoints, andlogging the settings. Tuning shall be self-tuning operation bythe controller unless manual tuning is necessary.

8.6.4.1 Controller Manual-Tunincr Procedure. A controllermanual tuning procedure is described in three steps using aconstant temperature setpoint controller as an example.

a) Step 1. This step shall consist of the following:

(1) Index the controller manual-automatic switch

to the automatic position, and set the integral and derivativemode constants to zero.

(2) Set the proportional mode constant to aninitial setting of 8 percent.degree F or a 1.5 psig per degree F proportional controlleroutput change for a 100-degree F span. This causes thecontroller output signal to vary from zero output to full outputfor an input signal change representing an 8-degree F change.

This corresponds to a 2.0 ma per

126



--`,,,,,`,````̀ ,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,̀ ,`,,`---



~ ~ ~

f l IL -HDBK-1003/3 El 9999970 0273837 4330 IIMIL-HDBK-1003/3

(3) Controllers for other variables, such asrelative humidity and static pressure, shall have theirproportional mode constants set initially in a similar manner foran achievable output range proportional to the transmitter span.

b) Step 2. This step shall consist of the following:

(1) Set the controller temperature setpoint at anyObserve the controller output andchievable temperature.

transmitter input.

(2) If the transmitter input continuouslyoscillates above and below the setpoint without settling at afixed value, or if such oscillation increases, the proportionalmode constant is too small.

( 3 ) If the proportional mode constant is too

small, increase it in steps until the transmitter input indicatesstable control at any temperature, if the controller output isnot at either extreme of the output range.

(4) If the temperature control point slowly driftstoward or away from the controller setpoint, the proportionalmode constant is too large. Decrease its setting in steps untiloscillations occur as described in the preceding paragraphs, andthen increase the setting until stable control occurs.

(5) Introduce a step change in controllersetpoint. This should cause the controller to overshoot the

setpoint slightly, with each subsequent overshoot peak valuedecreasing by a factor of two-thirds until stable control isachieved at, above, or below the setpoint.

(6) Increase the integral mode constant setting insmall steps, and introduce setpoint changes until control pointand controller setpoint coincide at stable control. This shouldhappen consistently after a setpoint change within a short time,such as 5 to 10 minutes.

c) Step 3 . This step shall consist of the following:

(1) Unless the WA C process variable changesrapidly, the derivative mode constant setting can remain at zero.

This is usually the case for most WAC applications.

(2) If derivative control is needed, graduallyincrease the derivative mode constant.

127



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` `

` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273838 7 7 7

( 3 ) Introduce step changes in controller setpoint,and adjust the derivative mode constant setting until stablecontrol is achieved.

d) Step 4. After the controller manual tuning

procedure is complete, set the controller at the predeterminedsetpoint in the design drawings.

8 . 6 . 5 Procedures for Sinsle Zone Control Svstem (Sample)

a) System Inspection. Observe the W A C system in itsshutdown condition. Check to see that power (and main air) is(are) available for the WAC system control devices. Check tosee that the outside air damper, relief air damper, heating coilvalve, and cooling coil valve are closed, and that the return airdamper is open.being controlled by the mixed air low limit controller.

Check to see that the preheat coil valve is

b) Calibration Accuracy Check. Check with W A C systemin the shutdown condition.thermometer at each temperature sensing element location. Readeach controller display, and log the thermometer and controllerdisplay readings.element to controller readouts for outside air, return air, mixedair, and supply air temperatures.

Take readings with a digital

Check the calibration accuracy of the sensing

c) Actuator Range Adjustments. Apply a signal to each

Verify visually the proper operation of theactuator, by placing the controller manual-automatic switch inthe manual position.

actuators for dampers and valves. Vary the signal from 4 ma (or3 psig) to 2 0 ma (or 15 psig), and verify that the actuatorstravel from zero stroke to full stroke within the signal range.Observe that sequenced and parallel operated actuators move fromzero stroke to full stroke in the proper direction, and move the

connected device in the proper direction from one extremeposition to the other. Example: Normally closed actuators areclosed at 4 ma (or 3 psig) and are open at 20 ma (or 15 psig).Log the signal levels that move the controlled device to itsextreme positions.

d) Control System Startup

(1) With the fan ready to start, apply theoptimized start mode command, and observe that the designatedsupply fan starts. Observe that the outside air and relief airdampers are closed, the return air damper is open, and the

heating coil valve and preheat coil valve (cooling coil valve)are in the warm up (cool down) position. Change the command tooccupied mode and observe that the outside air damper, return air

128



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~ ~ ______ ~~

MIL - HDBK- L003 /3 I 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273839 603 111

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

damper, relief air damper, heating coil valve, preheat coilvalve, and chilled water valve are in control, by changing thecontroller output.

(2) Apply the minimum outside air mode signal.Observe that the outside air damper opens to the minimumposition.

(3) Index the mixed air low limit temperaturecontroller manual-automatic switch to the manual position.Perform the two-point calibration accuracy check of sensingelement-to-controller readout. Index the mixed air low limittemperature controller manual-automatic switch to the automaticposition.valve slightly. Perform the controller tuning procedure. Setthe controller at the predetermined temperature setpoint.the economizer mode input signal, and observe that the outside

air, return air, and relief air dampers are under control. Indexthe supply air low limit temperature controller manual-automaticswitch to the manual position. Perform the two-point calibrationaccuracy check of sensing element-to-controller readout. Indexthe supply air low limit temperature controller manual-automaticswitch to the automatic position. Change the controller outputto open the heating coil valve slightly. Perform the controllertuning procedure.temperature setpoint.manual-automatic switch to the manual position, and perform thetwo-point calibration accuracy check of sensing element-to-controller readout. Index the controller manual-automatic switch

to the automatic position, and perform the controller tuningprocedure.shown.

Change the controller output to open the preheat coil

Apply

Set the controller at the predeterminedIndex the room temperature controller

Set the controller at the temperature setpoint as

( 4 ) Apply an unoccupied mode signal, and observethat the HVAC system shuts down, and the control system assumesthe specified shutdown conditions.temperature setting and observe that the HVAC system starts.Lower the setting and observe that the W A C system stops.the night thermostat at the predetermined setting.

Raise the night thermostat

Set

(5) With the W A C system running, simulate afilter differential pressure switch input signal at the device.Observe that the filter alarm is activated. Set the differentialpressure switch at the predetermined setpoint.

(6) With the W A C system running, simulate a lowtemperature condition at the freezestat. Observe HVAC systemshutdown and that the low temperature alarm is activated. Set

129



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9 9 9 9 7 7 0 0271840 325 m

the thermostat at the predetermined setpoint.system by manual reset, and observe that the alarm isdeactivated.

Restart the W A C

(7) With the W A C system running, simulate a smokedetector trip input signal at each detector, and observe andverify operation as described in the sequence of operation.Perform simulation without false-alarming any life safetysystems. Observe that the W A C system shuts down and the alarmis activated. Reset the detectors. Restart the HVAC system bymanual reset, and observe that the alarm is deactivated.

8.6.6 Procedures for Multizone Control Svstem (Sample)

a) System Inspection. Observe the HVAC system in itsshutdown condition. Check to see that power (and main air) is(are) available for the W A C system control devices. Check to

see that the outside air damper, relief air damper, heating coilvalve, and cooling coil valve are closed, and that the return airdamper is open.being controlled by the mixed air low limit controller.

Check to see that the preheat coil valve is

b) Calibration Accuracy Check. Check with the W A Csystem in the shutdown condition: take readings with a digitalthermometer at each temperature sensing element location; readeach controller display, and log the thermometer and controllerdisplay readings; and check the calibration accuracy of thesensing element to controller readouts for outside air, returnair, mixed air, cold deck air, and hot deck air temperatures.

c) Actuator Range Adjustments. Apply a signal to eachactuator by placing the controller manual-automatic switch in themanual position.actuators for dampers and valves. Vary the signal from 4 ma (or3 psig) to 20 ma (or 15 psig), and verify that the actuatorstravel from zero stroke to full stroke within the signal range.Observe that sequenced and parallel operated actuators move fromzero stroke to full stroke in the proper direction, and move theconnected device in the proper direction from one extremeposition to the other. Example: Normally closed actuators are

closed at 4 ma (or 3 psig) and are open at 20 ma (or 15 psig).Log the signal levels that move the controlled device to itsextreme positions.

Verify visually the proper operation of the


(1) With the fan ready to start, apply theoptimized start mode command, and observe that the designatedsupply fan starts. Observe that outside air and relief air

13



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

dampers are closed, the return air damper is open, and theheating coil valve and preheat coil valve (cooling coil valve)are in the warm-up (cool down) position. Change the command tooccupied mode and observe that the outside air damper, return airdamper, relief air damper, heating coil valve, preheat coilvalve, and chilled water valve are in control, by changing thecontroller output.

(2) Apply the minimum outside air mode signal.Observe that the outside air damper opens to the minimumposition.

( 3 ) Index the cold deck coil temperaturecontroller manual-automatic switch to the manual position, andperform the two-point calibration accuracy check of sensingelement-to-controller readout. Index the controllermanual-automatic switch to the automatic position, and perform

the controller tuning procedure. Set the controller at thetemperature setpoint as shown. Index the mixed air low limittemperature controller manual-automatic switch to the manualposition. Change the controller output to open the preheat coilvalve slightly. Perform the two-point calibration accuracy checkof sensing element-to-controller readout for outside air, returnair, and mixed air temperatures. Index the mixed air low limittemperature controller manual-automatic switch to the automaticposition. Apply the economizer mode input signal, and observethat the outside air, return air, and relief air dampers areunder control. Perform the controller tuning procedure. Set thecontroller at the predetermined temperature setpoint.

(4) Apply an unoccupied mode signal, and observethat the WA C system shuts down, and the control system assumesthe specified shutdown conditions. Raise the night thermostattemperature setting and observe that the HVAC system starts.Lower the setting and observe that the HVAC system stops. Setthe night thermostat at the predetermined setting.

(5) With the HVAC system running, simulate afilter differential pressure switch input signal at the device.Observe that the filter alarm is activated. Set the differentialpressure switch at the predetermined setpoint.

( 6 ) With the W A C system running, simulate a lowtemperature condition at the freezestat. Observe W A C systemshutdown and that the low temperature alarm is activated. Setthe thermostat at the predetermined setpoint. Restart the WA Csystem by manual reset, and observe that the alarm isdeactivated.

131



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

( 7 ) With the WA C system running, simulate a smokedetector trip input signal at each detector, and observe andverify operation as described in the sequence of operation.Perform simulation without false-alarming any life safetysystems. Observe that the W A C system shuts down and the alarmis activated. Reset the detectors. Restart the W A C system bymanual reset, and observe that the alarm is deactivated.

(8) Raise the temperature setpoint of each roomthermostat and observe that the zone damper closes to the colddeck and opens to the hot deck. Calibrate the room thermostat ofeach zone. Set each room thermostat at its predeterminedse point

8.6.7 Variable Air Volume Control Svstem (Sample)

a) System Inspection. Observe the W A C system in itsshutdown condition. Check to see that power (and main air) is

(are) available for the W A C system control devices. Check tosee that the outside air, relief air dampers, heating coil valve,and cooling coil valve are closed, and the return air damper isopen. Check to see that the preheat coil valve is beingcontrolled by the mixed air low limit controller.

b) Calibration Accuracy Check With W A C System inShutdown Condition. Take readings with a digital thermometer ateach temperature sensing element location. Read each controllerdisplay, and log the thermometer and controller display readings.Check the calibration accuracy of the sensing element-to-controller readout for outside air, return air, mixed air, and

cooling coil discharge air temperatures.

c) Actuator Range Adjustments. Apply a signal to eachactuator by placing the controller manual-automatic switch in themanual position. Verify visually the proper operation of theactuators for dampers and valves. Vary the signal from 4 ma (or3 psig) to 20 ma (or 15 psig), and verify that the actuatorstravel from zero stroke to full stroke within the signal range.Observe that sequenced and parallel operated actuators move fromzero stroke to full stroke in the proper direction, and move theconnected device in the proper direction from one extremeposition to the other. Example: Normally closed actuators areclosed at 4 ma (or 3 psig) and are open at 20 ma (or 15 psig).Log the signal levels that move the controlled device to itsextreme positions.


132



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



(1) With the fan ready to start, apply theoptimized start mode command, and observe that the designatedsupply fan starts. Observe that the outside air damper andrelief air damper are closed, the return air damper is open, andthe heating coil valve and preheat coil valve (cooling coil

valve) are in the warm-up (cool down) position. Change thecommand to occupied mode and observe that the outside air damper,return air damper, relief air damper, heating coil valve, preheatcoil valve, and chilled water valve are in control, by changing

the controller output.

( 2 ) Apply the minimum outside air mode signal.Observe that the outside air damper opens to its minimumposition.

(3) With the supply fan running, simulate a highstatic pressure input signal at the device by pressure input to

the sensing device.high pressure alarm is activated.manual reset, and observe that the high static pressure alarm isdeactivated.

Observe W A C system shutdown and that theRestart the HVAC system by

( 4 ) Index the supply fan static pressurecontroller manual-automatic switch to the manual position andperform a two-point accuracy check of sensing element-to-controller readout. Place the controller in the local setpointmode. Index the controller manual-automatic switch to theautomatic position, and perform the controller tuning procedure.Set the controller at the specified static pressure setpoint,

log the mode constant setpoints.

and

( 5 ) Index the supply air temperature controllermanual-automatic switch to the manual position, and perform the

two-point calibration accuracy check of sensing element-to-controller readout. Index the controller manual-automatic switchto the automatic position, and perform the controller tuningprocedure.shown. Index the mixed air low limit temperature controllermanual-automatic switch to the manual position. Change thecontroller output to open the preheat coil valve slightly.Perform the two-point calibration accuracy check of sensing

element-to-controller readout for outside air, return air, andmixed air temperatures.temperature controller manual-automatic switch to the automaticposition. Apply the economizer mode input signal, and observethat the outside air, return air, and relief air dampers are

under control. Perform the controller tuning procedure. Set thecontroller at the predetermined temperature setpoint.

Set the controller at the temperature setpoint as

Index the mixed air low limit

133



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



(6) Apply an unoccupied mode signal, and observethat the W A C system and fan powered VAV terminal units shutdown, and the control system assumes the specified shutdownconditions.observe that the VAV terminal units start with the terminal unitheating valve open.terminal units stop. Set the night thermostat(s) at thepredetermined setting.

Raise the night thermostat temperature setting and

Lower the setting and observe that theVAV

(7) With the HVAC system running, simulate afilter differential pressure switch input signal at the device.Observe that the filter alarm is activated. Set the differentialpressure switch at the predetermined setpoint.

(8) With the W A C system running, simulate a lowtemperature condition at the freezestat.shutdown and that the low temperature alarm is activated. Set

the thermostat at the predetermined setpoint. Restart the WACsystem by manual reset, and observe that the alarm isdeactivated.

Observe W A C system

( 9 ) With the HVAC system running, simulate asmoke detector trip input signal at each detector, and observeand verify operation as described in the sequence of operation.Perform simulation without false-alarming any life safetysystems. Observe that the HVAC system shuts down and the alarmis activated. Reset the detectors. Restart the HVAC system bymanual reset, and observe that the alarm is deactivated.

(10) Set each pressure dependent VAV terminal unit

Set heating and cooling room temperature setpoints.

Verify

to its minimum design airflow with a mechanical stop for the coldair damper.Observe and verify the actions of the controller, the operationof the damper, and the operation of heating coil valves.that space temperature is maintained.

134



--` , , , , ,` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~

MI L - HDBK- L 0 0 3 / 3 U 9999970 027LBLi5 907 D

Section 9: EQUIPMENT LOCATION

9.1 General. Sometimes a building designer will seekclever ways to hide mechanical equipment rather than integratingit into the building in a way that will best serve the Navy overthe life of the building. Although information and suggestions

on equipment locations are found throughout this handbook, it wasdeemed appropriate to repeat some of this pertinent data withinthis section.

9.2 SDecific Considerations

9.2.1 Noise. Will the noise from the equipment affect theuse and occupancy of the building? Consider the following:

a) Certain types of HVAC equipment will emit a lot ofnoise.

equipment. install chillers in a sub-room and enclose this roomwith masonry walls so that there is enough mass to attenuate theradiated noise.operators will not have to wear earmuffs all day to meet OSHA andNavy noise exposure criteria.room most of the time.

Centrifugal chillers are one type of noise emitting

The reason for a separate room is so that the

They can stay out of the chiller

b) Will objectionable levels of noise leak out andbother other occupants of the building or neighborhood?classic example of this is a noisy cooling tower that runs allnight long and keeps the nearby housing residents awake.clock on the mechanical system can sometimes help this problem.

Another example would be a noisy air handler located above a hungceiling that radiates sound downward into an occupied space(perhaps the base commander's office).

A

A time

9 .2 .2 Access for ODerations and Maintenance

a) is it a major building demolition effort to repairor replace W A C equipment?

b) Is it a major effort for the rigger to moveequipment out to the street for repair?

c) Design systems for ease of maintenance. Is it easyfor the HVAC mechanic to get to the equipment? Must the W A Cmechanic crawl, set up ladders, use alouver, remove access panels, walk ona rope to pull up his tools? Can thereplacement piping, pull the filters,

flashlight, remove aan unprotected roof, or usemechanic thread inpunch the tubes, acid clean

135



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```, ,̀```,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3

the heat exchangers, and replace the fan bearings? Considerproviding space for access, and lighting for maintenance, accessdoors, walkways, and catwalks.

9 . 2 . 3 Blocked Access. Is a critical access blocked, or is anannoying delay created when doing needed work on WAC?oil delivery truck block the main entrance?

truck get to the Siamese connection? Must salt bags for thewater softener be trucked through the lobby or a main corridor?Design for ease of maintenance.

Does theCan the fire pumper

9 . 2 . 4 Emission of Odors. A common source of odor is akitchen range hood from a side wall outlet. Consider the geometryof the site and adjacent buildings, both existing and proposed,for planning intakes and exhaust points. Review 10 year base mapplan for future building locations. Sometimes the kitchenexhaust can be run up a shaft and exhausted above the roof.

Another helpful way to minimize the problem is to use a washdownkitchen hood to reduce the odor.

Another source of odor is the pathological wasteincinerator at a hospital.with after burners create problems when burning tissue.solution is to transport the pathological waste to a remoteincinerator site for burning.

Even the newer types of incinerators

One

Use this philosophy when planning laboratory exhaustand outside air building intakes. Try point source containmentor neutralization of noxious exhausts at the hoods or exhaust

points or put stacks on the exhaust ducts.

9 .2 .5 Coolina Tower Vibration. Use care when locatingcooling towers on roofs of light steel frame buildings to avoidharmonic vibration of equipment. Vibration isolators are notalways a solution to this problem. Analytical tools areavailable to help solve vibration problems.can be retained to study vibration problems and providesolutions. This kind of equipment could be installed on the

basement floor slab or located elsewhere. Another possiblesolution is to change the equipment vibration frequency by

providing a concrete pad under the machine to eliminate itsharmonics.

A vibration engineer

13



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```, ,̀```,,`-`-`,,̀ ,,`,`,,`---



Section 10: FUNDAMENTAL DRAWING DETAILS

10.1 General. Refer to Section 4 and the A-E Handbookissued by the local NAVFACENGCOM EFD or EFA for an overview ofthe information required on the drawings.

10.2 SDecif cs

10.2.1 System Diacrrams and Schematics. See Figures 36 and 37for examples of system diagrams and schematics.

10.2.2 EuuiDment Schedules. See Tables 18 through 20 forexamples of equipment schedules.

10.2.3 Riser Diasrams. See Figures 38 and 39 for examples ofriser diagrams.

10.2.4 Duct Pressure Classifications. See Figure 40 for anexample showing duct pressure classifications.

10.2.5 Svmbols and Abbreviations. Consider the following whenusing symbols and abbreviations:

a) Use symbols and abbreviations found in ASHRAEHandbook, Fundamentals.

b) List only those symbols and abbreviations that areused in the design.

c) Coordinate the various abbreviation lists to ensurethat the abbreviations are not duplicated.

137



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



~ ~~~~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273646 6L L

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Figure 36Schematic Hot Water and Chilled Water Balancing Diagram

138



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~~~

~ ~

MIL - HDBK- L003 /3 = 9 9 9 3 9 3 0 0 2 3 3 8 4 9 5 5 2 13

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

PRESUTW7 a

FAN9000 C F M - t

SO O

CFM4

500

ir

5004cnr

5004

CFH

500

4 7

6000 CEM

l

1

+

3

4

r

F i g u r e 37Schematic Airflow Balancing Diagram

13



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 5995970 0271650 274 E

Table 1 8Typical Utility Fan Schedule

UTILITY FANNO. ON FAN SP MOTOR

DWGS TYPE DRIVE CFM RPM IN. HP PH V REMARKS

UFY SISW BELT 2920 1750 3.30 5 3 240 NON-SPARKING

I I

Table 19Sound Data Schedule

MAXIMUM SOUND POWER LEVEL (dB)OCTAVE BAND LEVEL CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)

EQUIPMENT 63 1 25 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000AIR COMPRESSOR 90 89 92 93 92 92 90 8 1FAN 55 50 48 47 48 46 42 37BOILER 7 5 72 72 7 5 7 6 63 55 50FAN COILS 68 66 62 58 52 47 43 37PUMPS 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72

Table 20Cooling Coil Schedule

AIR ENTER- LEAVING WATERS IZE PRESSURE ING AIR AIR PRESS. WATER

NO. ON IN. DROP IN. DEG. F DEG. F DROP TEMP.DWGS CFM W H WATER DB WB DB WB GPM FT IN OUT

CC-1 7200 42 33 0.36 90 70 75 65 35 1.30 55 61.7

1 4 0



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



flIL-HDBK-L003/3 I 9 9 9 9 7 0 027iBCL L O O mMIL-HDBK-1003/3

Figure 38Hot Water Riser Diagram

141



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



M I L - H D B K - L O n 3 / 3 m w w m Z ~ I , ~ S Z47 mMIL-HDBK-1003/3

USE DXFFERENT SHAPE OFSYMBOL FOR EACH TYPE OF

RKSER PIPING.

/ROOF (O'l---

SHOWING ALL OF RADIATION

ON THE RLSER DIAGRAH IS AGOOD COORDINATION CROSS-CHECK AJJD IS " D Y FOR ?HE

3IDDER'S MATERIAL TAKE-OFF.

INDFLOOR

US E THE PIPING S W L FROM

THE S W B O t LIST. PROVIDE

1STPLOOR 1 I

&1 II

b o o b b

/

US E THE PIPING S W L FROM

THE S W B O t LIST. PROVIDE

THE PIPING SIZE FOR EACRVERTICAL PART OF "HE RISER.SHOWKG THE CPM OR RADIATIONCAPACITY IN MBH ON THG:DUGRAH WILL HELP IN

HYDRONIC B W C ï N C .

DRAW THE DISTANCES B E l "

FLOORS TO SCALE.3/8" l'-O" ISR E C O " D E D .

Figure 39N o t e s on Drawing R i s e r Diagram

142



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



LEGEND

Figure 4 0Designating Duct Pressure Classes

143



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 II 7999970 0273854 73T e!

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Section 11: RULES OF THUMB GUIDANCE

11.1 General. The following information provides guidancethat could be used in planning to estimate utility requirementsand to assess the adequacy of equipment sizing during design

reviews. Note that it is preferable to do a quick block loadcalculation instead of using these rules of thumb.

11.2 Air Conditionins Capacitv. See Table 21.

11.3 Heatina CaDacitv. 35 to 40 Btu per square foot formild climate region (less than 4 , 0 0 0 degree days), no fresh airload.

11.4 Moisture Loads. See Table 22.

11.5 Chilled Water Circulation. 2.5 to 3.0 gallons per

minute per ton.

11.6 Hot Water

Gallon per minute = Btu/h(20 degree drop) 10,000

Gallon per minute = Btu/h500 x TD (temperature drop)

11.7 Condenser Water. Required thermal capacity of coolingwater = 15,000 Btu/h per ton, or

= 3 gpm per ton

11.8 Steam. 1 pound of steam per 1,000 Btu.

11.9 Condensate. 120 gallons per 1,000 pounds steam.

144



-- ̀

, , , , ,

̀ , ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~ f l I L - H D B K - 1 0 0 3 / 3 9999970 0273855 8 5 b .111

Table 2 1Air Conditioning Load Estimating Factors

APPLICATIONS AIR CONDITIONING FLOOR AREA SQ. FT./TON(EXCEPT WHERE NOTED)

BOWLING ALLEYSCOMPUTER ROOMSDINING ROOMSDISPENSARIESENLISTED MEN'S AND

OFFICER'S CLUBSHOSPITAL PATIENT R

ADMINISTRATION BUILDING 450-600AUDITORIUMS, THEATERS 0.004 TO 0.08 TONS/SEAT

0.8 TO 1 . 4 TONS/ALLEY50 TO 150175 TO 450450 TO 550275 TO 375

iMS 450 TO 550MULTIPLE FAMILY HOUSING 900 TO 1275

RECREATION ROOMS 375 TO 450RELIGIOUS FACILITIES 0.02 TO 0.03 TONS/SEATSHOPS (PRECISION 450 TO 550

TRAINING FACILITIES 4 0 0 TO 500BACHELOR QUARTERS 725 TO 900

UNITS

EQUIPMENT)

Table 22

Typical Load Breakdown of Dehumidified Warehouse

MOISTURESOURCE

FLOOR (WITHOUTA MEMBRANE)FLOOR (WITH AMEMBRANEWALL TRANSMISSIONROOF TRANSMISSION

BREATHINGWALL INFILTRATIONOPEN DOORSTORES (5% ANNüAL

TURNOVER)

MOISTURE LOAD PERCENT OF TOTAL MOISTURELB. WATER/DAY LOAD (FLOOR W/MEMBRANE)

180 TO 420

120 TO 240

50 TO 10020 TO 60

40 TO 55150 TO 300200 TO 400

50 TO 130

19

8

3 TO 5

3 TO 42 43 2

8 TO 11

1 45



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~ ~ I L - H D B K - ~ O O W ~ Rl 9999970 027LB5b 7 Y 2

MIL-HDBK-1003/3

Section 12: FIRE PROTECTION AND SMOKE CONTROL

12.1 General. Comply with MIL-HDBK-1008B. This is onephase of the WA C design effort when the designer should consultearly and often with the architectural designer to obtainlocations and ratings of firewalls, ceiling assemblies, exitpathways, smoke barrier partitions, shafts, stairwells, etc. Itis also the time to establish which codes and which provisions ofthese codes will apply.

12.2 Svstem Desim. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFGS-15971 orNFGS-15972. Some general references that should be followed areas follows:

a) Ceiling plenums of the HVAC system shall conform toNFPA 90A.

b) Follow applicable NFPA codes for exit corridors.Do not use the corridor for air movement for an HVAC system.

c) Put fire dampers in firewall and rated ceilingopenings, and smoke dampers at smoke barriers.

d) Put vertical ducts in rated shafts.

e) Systems 15,000 cfm and over shall have automaticfan shutdown activated by smoke detectors in the supply ductdownstream of the filter and in the return duct system at eachfloor.

f) Systems of 15,000 cfm and over shall also havesupply air and return air smoke dampers to isolate air handlingequipment from the occupied space.

g) Fire dampers and smoke detectors need access doorsin the ducts.

h) Smoke detectors are required in the supply air of

W A C systems from 2,000 to 15,000 cfm for child care centers,schools, brigs, hospitals, and others buildings where people

congregate. Do not use firestats.

I) Note that the above requirements will change if thedesigner provides an engineered smoke control system.

j) For engineered smoke control systems, refer toAppendix B.

146



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



12.3 Enaineered Smoke Control Svstem. If the designerelects to consider an engineered smoke control system in lieu offollowing the basic provisions of NFPA 90A, then note thefollowing:

a) It may not always serve the best interest of theNavy to install engineered smoke control systems in Navybuildings.

b) For information on engineered smoke controlsystems, refer to Appendix B.

147



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` ,

,̀ ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3 I îîî'ì70 0271858 rib5 111

APPENDIX AENERGY CONSERVATION METHODS

A-I. 0 Enerav Conservation bv Ontimization of Controls

A-1.01 intermittent OccuDancv Controls. Classrooms,conference rooms, cafeterias, and other areas with intermittentoccupancy shall have occupied/unoccupied switches.switches shall function to eliminate conditioning of spaces whenthe room is not being used.

These

A-1.02 S'Dace TemDerature Reauirements for Interior Zones.Refer to MIL-HDBK-1190.

A-I. 3 Perimeter Radiation Heatina Svstems Control. Perimeterheating system controls shall have daytime, and a lowernighttime, reset schedule. During occupied periods, excessive

internal heat gains are produced by internal loads (for examplepeople, lighting, and equipment). Perimeter radiation systemsshall be designed for the absence of these loads whilemaintaining night setback temperature.systems without reheat coils, provide radiation capacity to heatventilation air to room setpoint during occupied cycle.oversize but do add a 10 percent allowance for morning warm-upafter night setback.

When used with VAV

Do not

A-l. 4 Enersv Efficient Control Svstem

A-1.04.1 Nicrht Setback. A night setback allows the heatingsystem to cycle automatically at the minimum allowable spacetemperature. These systems are generally provided with timeclocks.for night, weekend, and holiday temperature setback (or cutoff)in the winter and set up (or cutoff) in the summer to reduceheating and cooling loads respectively. Normally, whenunoccupied, air conditioning for personnel comfort will be cutoff and heating will be reduced by approximately 15 degrees F.

Use electronic programmable time clocks or DDC programs

A.1.04.2 OccuPied/UnoccuDied Hot Water Reset Schedule. An

occupied/unoccupied hot water reset schedule is a dual setting

system which allows for use of internal heat from equipment,lights, and people as part of the heat supply during occupiedhours. See Figure A-1. During occupied hours, the setting is

lower than during unoccupied hours, when there is not as muchinternal heat gain.

A-1.04.3 Direct Diaita1 Control (DDC). DDC control systemsprovide the functions of a typical building automatic controlsystem. Systems can also provide an effective operator interface

148



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~~ ~

~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 111 9999970 027LBCî 4TL

APPENDIX A (Continued)

to allow diagnostics of W A C system operation from a remote

location. Use care to provide and locate accurate sensorsrequired by NFGS-15972.

There are many advantages of using DDC systems thatmake them preferred over conventional pneumatic, electric, or

electronic systems. These include lower first cost, systems with

fewer components, lower failure rate, greater accuracy ofcontrol, higher reliability, and lower maintenance cost. DDC

systems may also incorporate remote monitoring and self-tuning to

simplify operation and maintenance.

I

WATERTEMPERATURE

O F

Figure A-1

Occugied/Unoccugieä Hot Water Reset Schedule

14



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 II ïïïïï70 0 2 7 4 8 b û 133


NFGS-15972 was prepared to take advantage of the manydesirable features of a DDC system while minimizing anticipatedproblems by specifying appropriate hardware and software and by

requiring adequate training for activity personnel. DDC systemsshould be specified for new projects and major renovations whereoperators and maintenance personnel are DDC qualified or arewilling to accept DDC and receive proper training.conditions are not met, use NFGS-15971 and provide pneumatic,analog electronic, or electric control systems.

Where these

DDC systems may be selected for repair or renovation ofexisting control systems to save energy and take advantage of theother features of DDC systems.electric valves and other actuators are proper and functional,they may work with the replacement DDC system with the

appropriate interface.

Where existing pneumatic or

EMCS is an outmoded concept and should be discouragedand avoided.existing pneumatic and analog electronic control systems andprovided some energy saving strategies. Success of the EMCSdepended on proper operation of the existing control system.When the existing control system failed, EMCS failed. If energymonitoring features are desired, a DDC system should bespecified. If an operating EMCS is to be expanded and a DDCsystem will not be installed, refer to the Army Corps ofEngineers, Architectural and Enaineerina Instructions, Desian

Criteria, Chapter 11, "Energy Conservation Criteria,'' and guidespecification CEGS-15950, Heatina, Ventilatina, and AirConditionina (WAC) Control Svstems for selection andapplication.

EMCS added a computer based system to monitor

A-1.04.4 Thermostat SetDoints. Selective thermostat setpointsprovide a temperature range in which no mechanical heating or airconditioning takes place. See Figure A-2. Deadband thermostatsshould not be used. Rather thermostats with separate control andsetpoint for heating and cooling or DDC with separate controlloops should be used.

cooling within one degree F of the respective setpoints.

Strategies should control heating and

A-2.00 Enerav Conservation with Svstems

150



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 M 999997[3 027LBbl OST =MIL-HDBK-1003/3


h nFigure A -2

Thermostat Setpoints Diagram

A-2.01 Energy Efficient Systems. Design factors such as reliability can

have priority over energy efficiency. An energy saving feature that is

unstable or not maintained may fail and actually consume more energy than a

simpler stable HVAC system. Select the least complicated energy efficientsystem for the application. Energy efficient devices shall be specified when

possible if they are life cycle cost effective.

A-2.02 Economizer Cycle Systems. Contact the individual NAVFACENGCOM EFDor EFA for exact guidance on the use of economizer cycles. In the absence of

immediate guidance, systems larger than 10 tons shall be designed to use

maximum outside air f o r cooling whenever the outdoor dry bulb temperature is

lower than 60 degrees F more than 3000 hours per year. Operation shall be

limited by an outdoor air dry bulb sensor.

systems in humid climates.

Do not use economizer cycle

A-2-03 Multiple Parallel Equipment Systems. Multiple parallel equipmentsystems, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, heat exchangers, air

handlers, etc., provide superior operating efficiency, added reliability, and

the operating capacity required at design conditions. Use multiple equipment

systems when energy savings will offset higher first costs.

151



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3


A-2.04 Direct Exhaust Svstems. Direct exhaust systems mayreduce the cooling load in a space requiring high ventilationrates to remove high heat loads of a source.required for the extra makeup air.

Evaluate the energy

A-2-05 Heat Recoverv Svstems (Cascadina Eneraies) Considerthe following economic factors when evaluating heat recoverysystems

a) Higher first costs,

b) Higher maintenance costs,

c) Additional building space requirements, and

d) Added complication to W A C equipment.

A-3-00 Exhaust Air Heat Recoverv. With the air exhaust heatrecovery system in the heating mode, heat from exhaust air is

recovered and used to preheat the outdoor air supply, domestichot water, boiler combustion air, and boiler makeup water. Inthe cooling mode, exhaust air is used to pre-cool outdoor air.In addition to the economic factors cited above, system pressureis increased. The five methods available for exhaust air heatrecovery air are as follows:

a) Rotary air wheel method,

b) Static heat exchanger method,

c) Heat pipe method,

d) Runaround system/closed loop method, and

e) Runaround system/open loop method.

The rotary air wheel, static heat exchanger, and heatpipe methods require supply and exhaust ducts to be adjacent

ducts. Therefore, duct design should ensure that the outside airand exhaust air louvers are adequately separated to prevent crosscontamination. Do not use rotary air wheel for industrial

ventilating systems because of contamination carryover. For moreinformation, refer to ASHRAE EauiDment Handbook, the chapterentitled "Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment."

152



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -

` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~

~

MIL-HDBK-L003 /3 U 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273863 922 Ml


A-3.01 Rotarv Air Wheel. With the rotary air wheel, heattransfer takes place as the finned wheel rotates between theexhaust and supply duct.rotary air wheels

-one transfers only sensible heat, the other

transfers both sensible and latent heat.effective for an equal supply and exhaust mass flow rates, but acertain amount of unavoidable leakage will reduce thiseffectiveness.on the application, especially when the exhaust air is from aprocess source. Give this system full consideration in airconditioning and ventilating systems where exhaust air is 4 , 0 0 0

cfm or greater.

See Figure A-3. There are two types of

The wheel is 70 percent

Closely investigate cross contamination effects

A-3.02 Plate Heat Exchanuer. With the plate heat exchangermethod heat transfers across alternate passages carrying exhaust

and supply air in a counterflow or crossflow pattern.A-4 and Figure A-5.

See Figure

Plate heat exchangers are 40 to 80 percent efficient inrecovering heat, depending on the specific system design,temperature differences, and flow rates. Crossflow methods areusually more convenient, but counterflow methods are moreefficient. With the plate exchanger method, only sensible heatis transferred. Plate heat exchanger is a static device havingno moving parts, allowing for only a minimal chance of crosscontamination. It is a relatively simple method of heatrecovery.

A-3.03 Heat Pipe Method. The heat pipe method involves aself-contained, closed system which transfers sensible heat.

This method consists of bundles of finned copper tubes, similarto cooling coils, sealed at each and filled with a wick andworking fluid. The working fluid may be water, refrigerant, ormethanol.

For the most efficient system, the exhaust and supplyair shall be counterflow.sloping the heat pipe so the warm side is lower than the cool

side. See Figure A-6. For more information refer to ASHRAEEauipment Handbook, the chapter entitled "Air-to-Air EnergyRecovery Equipment. I

Performance also is improved by

A-3.04 Runaround System (Closed Loop) Method. With the closedloop systems method, a hydronic system transfers sensible heat

from the exhaust air to the outdoor air using water, glycol, orsome other sensible heat fluid. See Figure A-7.

153



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

MIL-HDBK-L003 /3 R!l 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 027LBb4 869 M!

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


Figure A-3Exhaust Air Heat Recovery With Rotary Air Wheel

154



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` `

` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~~~

MI L - HDBK- L 0 0 3 / 3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273865 7 T 5 111

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


Figure A-4Exhaust A i r Heat Recovery With Counterflow Pattern

S t a t i c Eeat Exchanger

155



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~ ~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 II 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 ï L B b b b31 B

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


Figure A-5Exhaust Air Heat Recovery With Crossflow P a t t e r n

Static H e a t Exchanger

156



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~ ~ ~~~

M I L -H D B K -L 0 0 3 / 3 î î ï ï î 7 0 0271867 5 7 8 mMIL-HDBK-1003/3


HEAT PIPE DETAIL

Figure A-6Exhaust A i r Beat Recovery Method With Heat P i p e

157



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~ ~~ ~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 W 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273868 404

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


SUPPLY $Y S iEM

EXHAUST ûYSfEY

I

Figure A-7Exhaust Air H e a t Recovery Method

W i t h Runaround (Closed Loop) System

158



--`,,,,,`,`̀ ```,,,`,```,̀ ,```,,`-`- ,̀,`,,`,`,,`---



NIL-HDBK-L003/3 II 9999970 0273869 340 m


The closed loop method consists of two coils (one inthe supply system and one in the exhaust system), a pump, and aclosed pipe loop. This method can be expected to increase the

outdoor air temperature by60

to 65 percent of the outdoor airand exhaust air temperature difference. If the winter designtemperature is 32 degrees F or below, this system requires anantifreeze solution.

A-3-05 Runaround Svstem íOr>en LOOP) Method. The open loopmethod transfers sensible and latent heat. This is anair-to-liquid, liquid-to-air enthalpy recovery system whereworking fluid flows into each cell with the aid of a pump, in amanner similar to cooling tower flow. See Figure A - 8 . Sorbentliquid used with this system can be bacteriostatic, if necessary.The open loop method shall not be used for high temperature

applications.

A-3.06 Ancillarv ComPonents. Ancillary components for exhaustair heat recovery methods include:

a) Energy recovery devices for supply/exhaust filters,

b) Preheat coils,

c) Backdraft dampers,

d) Exhaust dampers,

e) Recirculation dampers,

f) Face and bypass dampers, and

g) Drainage provisions.

Controls and ancillaries shall be shown on drawings andsupplemented by specifications, as necessary. Select the minimumacceptable energy transfer effectiveness and the maximumacceptable cross-contamination.

A-3.07 Condensate Cooler/Hot Water Heat Recovery Method. Thecondensate cooler/hot water heat recovery method uses a heatexchanger, which removes heat from condensate not returned to theboiler. This recovered heat can be used to preheat domestic hotwater, boiler makeup water, or low temperature water return toboiler or heat exchanger.

159



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 0 9999970 0273870 O b 2IMIL-HDBK-1003/3


Figure A-8Exhaust A i r Heat Recovery Method

W i t h Runaround (Open Loop) System

160



--`,,,,,`,````̀ ,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 027L87L T T 9 IMIL-HDBK-1003/3


A-3.08 Heat-of-Lisht Heat Recoverv Method. The sensible heatgiven off by the lighting fixtures is a large portion of thetotal cooling load. Recovery of this heat reduces energy usageboth by reducing the room cooling load and by recovering usableheat. In some instances, the efficient removal of heat-of-lightthat does not enter the room may reduce the air supply to the

room below that which is desirable. Verify that effective aircirculation is maintained.recovery are the light troffer and induced air methods. Wherelife cycle cost effective, use heat-of-light recovery method inair conditioned spaces. Do not use for clean rooms, animallaboratories, and laboratories with toxic, explosive, orbacteriological exhaust requirements.

Recommended methods of heat-of-light

A-3.09 Licrht Troffer Method. The light troffer method removes

space air by pulling it through a light troffer or through alight fixture, and transfers it into the ceiling plenum where itis routed into the return air system. See Figure A-9. With thissystem, the room cooling load is reduced. Also, less air isrequired to cool the room, making it possible to use smaller ductand fan systems. Do not use for VAV systems.

With this method, the total cooling load issubstantially reduced for outdoor air supply systems, but not assignificantly for systems not capable of providing 100 percentoutdoor air. This technique also reduces the luminaire surfacetemperature and, therefore, increases ballast and lamp life.

A-3. O Induced Air Method. The induced air method removes airfrom the space by pulling it through the light troffer or througha lighting fixture, and transfers it into the ceiling plenum, tobe recirculated or discharged outdoors. See Figure A-10.

A-3.11 Refriseration Heat Recoverv Method. The refrigerationheat recovery method uses heat rejected from the refrigerationmachine. This method uses four different techniques:

a) Conventional refrigeration machine method,

b) Heat pump method,

c) Single condenser water circuit method, and

d) Double condenser water circuit method,

161



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 M 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 1 8 7 2 335

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


Figure A-9Heat-of-Light Recovery Method With Light Troffer

162



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~

~

f lIL-HDBK-1003/3 ?99Y?O 02’71873 8’71 IIMIL-HDBK-1003/3


1

Figure A-10Heat-of-Light Recovery Method With Induced Air

163



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -




The refrigeration heat recovery method is suitable whena refrigeration-type compressor is used, and when simultaneousheating and cooling of one or more spaces is required.

A-3.12 Conventional Refriaeration Machine Method. Theconventional refrigeration machine method uses a direct expansioncooling coil in conjunction with either a hot water orrefrigerant coil. See Figure A-11 and Figure A-12.

A hot water heating system extracts heat from therefrigerant through a heat exchanger. For direct air heating, acondensing refrigerant coil is used instead of a heat exchangerand water pump. This method is used for lower capacity systemswith reciprocating compressors. An air-cooled condenser is usedto reject heat when space heating is not required.

A-3-13 Internal Source Heat Pump Method. See Figure A-13.

A-3-14 Sinsle Bundle Condenser Water Circuit Method. Thesingle bundle condenser water circuit method uses a cooling coilin conjunction with a hot water system for heat recovery.space heating is not required, heat is rejected through anevaporative cooler, a heat exchanger, and an open cooling tower.

When

Application of this system is limited to a maximumwater temperature of 110 degrees F. This system can be used withany compressor type. See Figure A-14.

A-3-15 Double Bundle Condenser Water Circuit Method. Thedouble bundle condenser water circuit method incorporates twoseparate condenser water circuits - one for the heating systemand one for the cooling tower system.125 degrees F can be obtained by using higher compressor speeds,larger impellers, or more than one stage. See Figure A-15.

Water temperatures up to

Selection of a heat recovery machine is criticalbecause relatively high condensing temperatures are required.prevent surging of the compressor under operating load and

required condenser water conditions, lower the condensingtemperatures under partial load conditions. Units shall beselected to operate above 50 percent of full load at all times.Storage tanks may be incorporated into a double bundle condenserwater circuit system.

To

164



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



M I L - H D B K - 3 0 0 3 / 3 W 9 9 9 7 9 7 0 0273875 b 4 4


ICOOLIWO CO K WATIW COIL 8UFPLV FAN

NtAT RECOVLRV

=Ann0 COIL

IECIRCULATIWO

AIR

m UPPLY AIR

Ala

PERIMETER___

ZONE-OlRLCT E X P A N S I O I 1SUPPLY

COOUI(0 COK,

RECIRCULATINO ai

CONDENSER

THREE-WAY VALVE

RECIFROCA T I N 9

, COYPRLSSOA

- . -

F i g u r e A-11Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery With Conventional

Refrigeration Machine Using Hot Water Coil

165



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~

MIL-HDBK-100313 6 9999970 0273876 580 H

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


---I-lle-

U II

INTERIOR Z3NE

Figure A-12Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery With Conventional

Refrigeration Machine Using Refrigerant C o i l

166



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -




Figure A-13Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery With

Internal Source Heat Pump

167



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~ ~ ~

MIL-HDBK-L003 /3 H 9999770 0273878 353 E

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


INTERIOR ZONE

Figure A-14Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery

with Single Bundle Condenser Water Circuit Methodand Open Cooling Tower

168



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , ,

, ` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -




IWTBRIOR ZONE

Figure A-15Refrigeration Method Heat Recovery

With Double Bundle Condenser Water C i r c u i t Method

169



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,

` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3


Complete an economic evaluation for use of heatrecovery machines in large systems.the large system can be designed for multiple machine

installations by using conventional machines in conjunction withheat recovery machines. The selection of a double tube bundlemachine is a design function where standby low-grade demandexists.machine.

If economically justified,

Where this cannot be justified, use a single tube bundle

A-4-00 WAC System Manaaement. Cycling the boiler andrefrigeration chiller in a pattern responsive to the time of dayand prevailing weather conditions reduces energy consumption byreducing excess heating and cooling capacity during operatinghours. For large buildings, a computerized energy managementsystem may be justified.

conditions, building and system characteristics, and WA Coperating conditions.various controls to provide optimum energy use.

These systems can analyze weather

Energy management systems then adjust

170



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



APPENDIX BENGINEERED SMOKE CONTROL SYSTEMS

B1.00 Introduction. By the very nature of this type ofsystem; some of the requirements of NFPA 90A will need to bemodified or suspended. If air movement or pressures from theduct system are necessary to confine or control the flow ofsmoke, fans should not be shutdown or dampers closed.

B2.00 SDecific Desian Guidance

a) Suggested for use in large zones.

b) Smoke dampers should meet UL 5 5 5 8 , Standard for

Class 1 is a good

Safetv Leakaae Rated Damxiers for Use in Smoke Control Svstems.These are made in ratings of zero to four.tight damper. Use Class 1 dampers where the return or exhaust

air may meet the outside air to prevent contaminating the supplyair with smoke.may otherwise be used for smoke zone dampers.

Class 2 or Class 3 dampers (with more leakage)

c) Return ducts used for smoke purging should be steelSupply ducts should be insulated for protectionabrication.

from fire outside the duct.

d) Fans used for smoke exhaust should be rated for 750degrees F continuous duty. Use an extended shaft and acommercially available propeller on the shaft to blow air ontothe motor. The air temperature in the fire room may reach 1,400

degrees F, but this may be diluted with 70 degrees F air fromother rooms to permit use of an ordinary fan. Do not put themotor in the airstream and do not use an aluminum fan wheel. Donot stop the smoke exhaust fan during a fire.

e) Specify acceptance testing of the smoke controlsys ems

171



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` `

` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 II 7 9 9 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 8 6 2 884

APPENDIX CDESIGN DO'S AND DON'TS FOR VAV SYSTEMS

c-l. 0 Introduction

c-l.1

Scor>e and Criteria. This appendix is intended for useby qualified engineers who are responsible for preparation andreview of plans and specifications for construction of VAV, WAC,and dehumidifying systems. It complements the requirements ofNAVFACENGCOM and DOD manuals and instructions for theconstruction of W A C systems. The designer is reminded thatnormal construction and maintenance problems encountered with all

types of W A C systems are not covered here, but should be fullyconsidered in the design.

c-l. 2 Excellent Facilities. The objective of W A C systemdesign is to provide excellent places to work and live for Navy

and Marine Corps personnel.life cycle cost of the facilities, but also to maximize theperformance of the people who use the facilities.offer enhanced comfort by allowing economical flexibility inzoning, better temperature control, better passive humiditycontrol at part load, and greater energy efficiency.

The goal is not only to minimize the

VAV systems

C-l. 3

perform as the designer intends. An investigation of the causesof failure shows that considerable improvement in the success ofVAV can be achieved by special attention to good designpractices. This appendix is intended to provide feedback toalert the designer to recognize those areas where carefulattention can prevent deficiencies commonly found in Navy VAVsystems.

Importance of Design. Navy VAV systems often do not

a) VAV systems incur problems for the same basicreasons that other types of air conditioning systems do. Theyare either improperly designed, constructed, or operated andmaintained.

b) Deficiencies in design often result from bothtechnical and practical aspects of the design.

practical decisions often occur in the following areas: (1) lackof consideration of the constructability of the design,

( 2 ) failure to appreciate the importance of designing systemsthat can be operated and maintained, and (3) failure tocommunicate in sufficient detail the design intent and thusleaving too many decisions to the contractor.

Improper

c) Deficiencies in construction, inspection, andacceptance occur primarily in three areas: (1) the system may

172



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9 9 9 7 9 7 0 0273663 730 111

APPENDIX C (Continued)

not be installed as designed, (2) the system is installed to meetrequirements of the design and submittals but quality ofworkmanship is such that the system will not function properly,

and (3) although construction might be satisfactory in allrespects, acceptance testing is of poor quality and latentdefects in the systems go undetected.

d) Operation and maintenance deficiencies can occurfrom insufficient or improper training, the system receivinginadequate operating and maintenance attention, and the system

receiving well meaning but misguided operation and maintenanceattention.

e) A failure in any of these areas can be fatal to thesuccessful operation of a VAV system.

C-l. 4 Svstem SirnDlicitv. The most common fault of themajority of designs is that the systems are too complicated towork reliably. Some systems never work initially, others failbecause Naval operation and maintenance personnel do notunderstand them sufficiently to keep them working as designed.The chief area of concern is control systems.

always tempted to add features to improve performance andconserve energy but must weigh the potential benefits against theadditional cost and complexity. Feedback: On the average,systems have too many features and are too complex for the needsof the Navy. The designer should design systems that err towardsimplicity, at the expense of features, and require minimummaintenance.

A designer is

C-l. 5 Earlv Coordination. Having experienced numerousproblems on VAV systems, the Navy wishes to have a high level ofinteraction between the designer and the Engineer in Charge andwill often want to give the designer more direction than isnormal. To minimize design changes, it is important that therebe good communication.stages of the design.intent and the critical concepts of his proposed system,including simplicity in operation and maintenance, at the firstsubmittal opportunity. This will prevent the necessity ofchanging the concept of the design.

This is particularly true in the earlyThe designer shall communicate his design

C-l. 6 Dry Climates. Many Naval facilities are located inhumid climates and so there is a tendency to tailor designguidance for humid areas. There are also many Naval facilitieslocated in dry and cold climates. The practice associated withdesign in these facilities can be considerably different. The

173



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` `

` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-1003/3


designer must be careful to fit his design to the area where heis working. Typical conditions in dry and cold climates arethat: the relative humidity is low; the daily dry bulb range ishigh; the outdoor air economizer is effective

(at least for nightpurging); the sensible heat ratio is high and systems are oftendesigned primarily to handle the sensible load and to let theroom relative humidity float as it will. Naval facilitieslocated in dry and cold climates may require modifications to thecriteria listed below.

C-l. 7 Selection of n/r,e of Control Svstem. Design controlsystems as simple as possible to provide adequate control andgive careful consideration to the following when selecting thetype of control system:

a) Pneumatic Controls. Pneumatic controls seldom workconsistently well in Naval facilities. Pneumatic controlsrequire frequent maintenance and calibration at a level that isnot usually performed by Naval personnel. Pneumatic systems areprone to fail from water or oil in the compressed air.pneumatic control systems are never set up properly by theinstalling contractor. Even hybrid control systems (e.g., DDCwith pneumatic actuators) can have similar problems because theelectric-to-pneumatic transducers have small passages that arevulnerable to moisture and oil in the compressed air.things being equal, pneumatic control is not a good choice forthe control system; but if operation and maintenance personnel

are expert in pneumatic controls, have adequate funds formaintenance, and refuse to use state-of-art systems, pneumaticsystems may be justified.

Many

All other

b) Electric Control. For the sake of simplicity,electric VAV terminal unit controls may be used in conjunctionwith pressure dependent (PD) terminal units (refer topar. C-2.10). This type of zone temperature control requiresonly the simplest of control sequences and therefore, will beeasier for Naval operation and maintenance personnel tounderstand and maintain. Electric controls for the central

equipment (e.g., HW valve and control, etc.) are in common useand are suitably rugged, however, may not be accurate enough forthe application.

c) Analog Electronic Control. If pressure independent(PI) terminal units are used, it will be necessary to haveelectronic controls. Analog electronics usually introduceadditional levels of complexity whose advantages can beoutweighed by the likelihood that they will not be understood by

174



--`,,,,,`,````̀ ,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 @à 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273885 593


the operating and maintenance personnel. It is recommended that

electronic controls be used with as simple a sequence aspossible.

d) DDC. DDC is the state-of-art of control systemsand is in common use throughout the industry.are distributed (have controllers located near the equipmentbeing controlled) and usually include a means for the operator todiagnose WA C operation from a remote location.the system of choice for Naval projects if the facility operatingand maintenance personnel are qualified in DDC systems or, atleast, are willing to take the recommended training and make asincere effort to properly use DDC.overdesign the DDC system, should make it simple, and as userfriendly as possible. It is critical that quality DDC sensors be

used which have long term (5 years) stability to minimizemaintenance and calibration while providing accurate conditions.

DDC systems may incorporate energy management strategies inaddition to normal control functions with little or no additionalcost.

Navy DDC systems

A DDC system is

The designer should not

c-2.00 Do's and Don'ts

c-2. 1

in load calculations.adequate safety factor included. Feedback: Many Navy VAVsystems are significantly oversized. This not only costs more,but it handicaps the system in performing the already difficulttask of providing comfort under difficult part load conditionscommonly seen in humid, coastal environments where many Navyinstallations are located.factor in VAV systems, they are more "forgiving" of capacityshortages than are constant volume systems.

Do not oversize the system. Do not add safety factorsThe calculation methods already have an

Because of the inherent diversity

c-2.02 Use computerized load calculations based on the ASHRAEtransfer function method.temperature difference/time averaging (TETD/TA) method or thecooling load temperature difference/cooling load factor

(CLTD/CLF) methods are not as accurate and require engineeringjudgment which typically leads to unnecessary conservatism.

The manual use of the total equivalent

C-2.03 Design for diversity. Select central air handlingequipment and heating/refrigeration systems for "block" loads.Spread diversity appropriately through the supply ducts, takingfull diversity at the air handling unit, and lessening diversity

175



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~ ~ ~

f l IL-HDBK-1003/3 = 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273886 4 2T E


when moving away from the air handling unit toward the VAVterminal units, until no diversity is taken at the distant VAVterminal runouts.

C-2-04 Design and specify for both peak and part loadconditions. Submit design calculations verifying that carefulconsideration has been given to the following areas:

a) Consider the psychrometric performance of thecooling coil (taking into account the method of capacity control)during difficult off peak conditions when the room sensible heatratio can be significantly reduced.difficult off peak conditions for analysis. At a minimum, showhow the system will perform when sensible load due to solar islost while latent loads remain constant. This is not necessary

in dry climates. The VAV system may operate with 100 percentoutside air during warm-up or on maximum heating days.

Select appropriately

b) When selecting a fan for a VAV system, submitdesign calculations verifying the system has been analyzed at thefollowing three points: (1)normal peak load (includingdiversity), (2) maximum cooling load (no diversity with VAV boxdampers open), and ( 3 ) minimum cooling load (with VAV boxes atthe minimum flow condition). The supply fan should bescheduled/specified (cfm and pressure) to satisfactorily meet ailthree of these operating points. Submit design calculations anda typical fan performance curve showing all of these points

plotted. A fan should never be selected which will becomeunstable or overload anywhere on its operating curve.

c) Consider limiting the size of VAV air handlingunits to 10,000 cfm for flexibility and ease of maintenance.Plan for units to serve zones with different exposures to achieveunit diversity.

d) VAV terminal boxes should be sized with bothmaximum and minimum flows in mind. Schedules should indicatecfm, neck velocity, pressure drop, and noise criteria at bothmaximum and minimum flow (refer to par.

C-2.11).

e) For air distribution devices, the minimum allowable"throw" should be scheduled for both maximum and minimum flowconditions.

f) If an outside air injection fan is used to maintainminimum ventilation, select a fan with a "steep" fan curve whichwill maintain a relatively constant flow regardless of mixing box

176



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` `

` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---




pressure. This analysis will be similar to that used forspecifying the supply fan.pressure expected in normal operation of the supply fan, estimate

the expected range of mixing box pressures.deliver design minimum ventilation at an average system operatingpoint (typically less than design peak). With this method ofselection, the fan will deliver slightly more than design underpeak flow conditions and slightly less than design under minimumflow conditions.satisfactorily meet flow requirements at each of these threeoperating points.

Knowing the range of total static

Select the fan to

The fan should be scheduled/specified to

g) Submit detailed computerized design calculations(this is mandated by the static regain method for sizing) whichindicate the amount of diversity used for sizing ductwork and

where the diversity was applied.

h) it is recommended that the system be designed for 8

to 1 2 air changes per hour with a minimum supply airflow of 4 airchanges per hour.

C-2.05This will require computerized ductwork design analysis.return ductwork using the equal friction method. The staticregain method keeps the static pressure in the supply system morenearly constant throughout. This enhances the inherent controlstability of the system. It also greatly assists in naturally

balancing airflow through the system minimizing any advantage forusing PI terminal boxes. Using the static regain method requiresthat more attention be given to the design of the duct system butthis is effort well spent.

Design supply ductwork using the static regain method.Design

C-2 -06 To control humidity and for simplicity, design for aconstant cooling supply air temperature.temperature should be controlled using a chilled water valvemodulated to maintain supply air temperature as sensed by aleaving air sensor.increases the sensible heat ratio of the coil and leads to highspace relative humidity and poor indoor air quality.potential to save refrigeration energy by raising the coolingsupply air temperature is more than offset by the increased fanenergy needed to move more air. In addition, changes in supplyair temperature can lead to condensation on and around diffusers.Exception: There are cases where, to prevent overcooling atminimum flow or to minimize reheating, resetting the cooling

The leaving air

Resetting the supply air temperature upwards

The

177



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~ ~~

MIL-HDßK-L003/3 1111 99999’70 0271888 2 T 2


supply air temperature might be appropriate. Also there arecases in dry climates where it would be permissible to varysupply air temperature.

C-2.07 Measuring

and control requirements for tracking the return air fan with thesupply air fan are too demanding to work in a Naval VAV system.in most cases a return fan is unnecessary to return air to theHVAC unit. in cases where the pressure drop in the return ductexceeds the drop for outdoor air, the mixing box may be at alower suction pressure.with this in mind.

Do not use a return air fan in a VAV system.

Select outside air and return dampers

C-2.08 Economizers should be used when significant benefitscan be shown. (Clearly dry or cold climates are cases where

economizers can be effective.) Feedback: Economizers in NavyVAV systems fail in a majority of cases due to complexarrangements. Keep economizer systems simple and use onlyoutdoor air dry bulb sensors for changeover. The economizing

feature can save a lot of energy in many applications but thedesigner must confer with the appropriate NAVFACENGCOM EFD or EFAwhen using this design.

a) Economizers should have outdoor air dry bulb typechangeover instead of outdoor air versus return air comparatorsor enthalpy type changeovers.

b)be designed with gravity relief. Return or relief fans shouldnot be used.

Economizers should only be used when the system can

C-2.09 Maintainins Ventilation Air. In most systems there arecircumstances under which satisfying the cooling load will notadequately ventilate the space. Unless it can be shown that thisis not the case, the designer shall design a positive means ofmaintaining ventilation rates during minimum flow conditions, to

maintain IAQ. Select minimum positions of VAV terminai units tomeet this requirement. Note:to absolutely maintain a minimum ventilation airflow to anyspace. The best that can be done is to maintain a constantventilation airflow on a per air handling unit basis andrecognize that ventilation will be improved in any zone that isshorted by mixing between rooms (especially in zones wherefan-powered boxes are used) and shorted rooms tend to be thosewhere people and lights are not present, and thus the ventilation

requirements are lower anyway. Use ASHRAE Standard 62 tomaximize IAQ.

It is impossible with a VAV system

178



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---




To maintain a constant outside air quantity being drawnin and supplied by the M U , a separate outside air injection fanor PI VAV box should be used. Use of an injection fan is

encouraged rather than a PI VAV box because it is a more reliablemethod of providing constant ventilation from a simplicity andmaintainability viewpoint. The designer should be aware that PIunits rarely work properly in Navy installations because ofmaintenance problems with PI velocity sensing hardware/controls.Properly working PI units, however, would be a more accuratemeans of providing a constant flow throughout a given range ofmixing box pressures. A PI unit should be considered if therange of mixing box pressures expected is such that it would bedifficult to specify a fan which would deliver acceptable flowsthroughout the range of pressure.

c-2.10 Pressure Dependent (PD) Boxes. The use of PD VAV boxesrather than PI boxes is recommended. Feedback: PI velocityresetting controls are often a significant contributor to failureof Navy VAV systems.units to use in a system, give careful consideration of thefollowing feedbacks:

When determining the type of VAV terminal

a) The most important feature touted for PI units isthat they respond to fluctuations in system pressure and thusenhance control stability by reducing "hunting." However, whenthe supply duct system has been properly designed for staticregain, there is no clear evidence that the use of PI units

results in greater zone temperature control stability than whenusing PD units. The transfer functions and time constants in atypical VAV unit control are such that the potential benefits ofvelocity resetting are nullified by the disadvantages of theadditional and complicated control loop.

b) PI controls claim to render the whole systemvirtually self-balancing. However, in a system with PD controlsand a well designed static regain duct system, the VAV dampers

respond to changes in load sensed by the thermostat and respondto balance the air in a similar way.

c) Maximum and minimum airflow limiting is a featurethat is inherent with PI control units. However, there is somequestion as to how well the velocity sensors used for thispurpose actually measure flow (setpoints are at the extreme lowend of their range). Some manufacturers say the velocity loop

readily drifts out of calibration and must be auto-calibratedregularly by using a DDC system.airflow.

The problem is worse at lower

A differential pressure flow ring or flow cross is

179



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 II 9999970 027Lö90 950 M


accurate only down to about 400 fpm (which unfortunately might beas high as 33 to 50 percent of maximum flow in many cases).Since desired minimum flow will usually be less than this, thedifferential pressure PI is not accurate for controlling minimumflow. The other common method uses a hot wire anemometer orsimilar device for sensing. This is not very good because thesensor is a single point in the inlet duct rather than amulti-point device (as used by the flow ring described above).it would only be accurate for a box that had many diameters ofstraight duct upstream (not the usual case). In addition, theresponse time is too slow for good PI control.

d) Minimum flow can be set on PD units by installingmechanical stops, by setting the actuator stroke through linkageadjustments, or by other similar means. These are

straightforward testing and balancing procedures.

e) PI costs somewhat more than PD on the average, ismuch more complicated for maintenance personnel, and theadditional control components are more prone to failure.

f) If PI is used, however, the designer must becareful to specify that supply maximums and minimums are checkedafter the equipment is installed. Factory adjustments haveproven to not be an adequate guarantee that the installedequipment will function as needed.

c-2.11 Carefully consider the throttling characteristics whenselecting the type and size of VAV terminal units. The installedcharacteristic curve of a throttling damper expected to modulatesupply air to a space, is a function of the inherentcharacteristic curve of the device and the ratio of the systempressure drop to the drop across the damper at maximum flow. As

the pressure drop of the damper at maximum flow is reduced (byselecting larger and larger dampers for a given flow rate--apractice promoted by the desire to save fan energy), theinstalled characteristic tends to move across the spectrum towardquick opening characteristics. The geometry of butterfly dampers

tends to exaggerate this shift. With dampers specially designedto retain linearity, this shift can be greatly reduced.

a) A shift toward quick opening increases the gain ofthe control component, i.e., a smaller part of its stroke isactually used f o r control. This is detrimental to the stabilityof the control system. The common tendency of selecting damperswith very low pressure drops can result in control that is nearly

180



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---




"two-position."have a system that provides more stable control.control dampers will be smaller than fan casings and have greater

maximum flow pressure drops than those usually used.

It is better to pay some fan energy penalty andProperly sized

b) If PI terminal units are used, sizing becomes evenmore critical. Oversizing the boxes to reduce maximum flowpressure drop results in low neck velocities, which in turncreate problems for PI flow measuring devices. To minimizeproblems with sensing minimum flows in PI VAV boxes, size the boxsuch that at minimum flow, the neck velocity will be at least 500fpm.

c-2-12 Give special attention to linkages (VAV terminal unitdamper, fan inlet guide vanes, and controllable pitch vanes).

Feedback: Problems due to poorly designed/constructed linkagesare very common in Naval VAV systems.describe linkage requirements (because manufacturers are so

different, this may be difficult for VAV terminal units) or atleast require detailed shop drawings of linkages and pay closeattention to them. Finally, linkages should be included in thespecifications as a specific item to be performance checkedduring the acceptance testing of the system.

Either specifically

C-2.13coordinating which of his subcontractors provides VAV terminalunits/controls/actuators. Feedback: Contractors' lack of

coordination of the VAV terminal unit and controls often leads toproblems which go undetected.policy recognizes only the Contractor as the single entity, andnot the subcontractors (thus not stating who does what), carefulattention to submittals in this area will avoid many problems.To help with this, the VAV boxes, thermostats, and associatedequipment should be specified as a system and the Contractor berequired to make his submittal for all items at the same time.

Pay close attention to Contractor's responsibility of

Even though DOD specification

C-2.14air outlets is used, consider the full range of flow rates

expected.performance (e.g., the Coanda effect depends upon having a flatceiling, without interruptions, etc.).

Whichever of the available methods of selecting supply

Recognize the effects of room geometry on satisfactory

a) It is recommended that VAV supply diffusers be ofthe linear slot type capable of supplying air horizontally alongthe ceiling utilizing the Coanda effect to provide good airdistribution. In cooling only applications, the diffusers shouldbe located centrally in the space and blow in all directions. In

181



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---




exterior spaces with fan-powered boxes, the location depends onthe magnitude of the heating load. If the heating load is lessthan 250 Btuh per linear foot of exterior wall (including

infiltration), the diffuser should again be located centrally andblow in all directions.400 Btuh per linear foot of exterior wall, the diffuser should belocated near and parallel to the exterior wall and blowhorizontally back into the room.

If the heating load is between 250 and

b) Diffusers which have operable internal dampers forvarying airflow should not be used in lieu of conventionalduct-mounted terminal units in a VAV system design.

C-2.15 Locate the static pressure sensor, for modulating fancapacity, out in the supply duct system, not at the fan

discharge. Expect some field adjustment to be required to findthe best location. In many systems, the first location istwo-thirds the distance from the supply fan to the end of themain trunk duct. Sensors shall have proper static sensing

elements.

Provide protection against overpressurization of theThis should be accomplished by a high limit ductupply duct.

static pressure sensor located at the fan discharge.should turn off the supply fan if the duct static pressure risesabove setpoint and require manual reset of the supply fan.

This sensor

C-2.16systems.static regain method (refer to par. C-2-05) and VAV terminalunits are properly sized/selected (refer to par. C-2.11) and setup properly during commissioning, the system should besufficiently self-balancing.

Balancing dampers should not be necessary for VAVIf the supply ductwork is designed properly using the

C-2.17 Use round ducts wherever space availability permits.Round ducts are acoustically superior to rectangular ducts andnormally cost less. in high velocity systems, the additionalfriction losses of duct walls and balancing dampers ofrectangular ducts cause the system to be inherently less stable.

Round ducts also produce less noise than rectangular ducts.

C-2.18 To save construction expense, it is now common to serveceiling outlets with short runs of flexible duct. Limit thelength of flexible duct and avoid bends to minimize duct frictiondrop. Figure these pressure drops, and do not show longer runs

182



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~ -

MI L - HDBK- 2 0 0 3 / 3 .II 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0271893 bbT


on the drawings than you allow in the specifications. Seekself-balancing by having equal lengths of flexible ducts insteadof long and short runs on the same system.

When designing VAV systems, do not use flex ductupstream of the terminal VAV box (i.e., between the air handlingunit and the VAV box). Use flex duct only to make terminal runsto diffuser boots and limit applications to straight runs of nomore than 5 feet. Hard duct 90 degree elbows should be used toconnect the flex duct to the diffuser boot. Do not use flex ductfor elbows.

C-2.19 Many zones in Navy buildings do not need heating.These include zones in a building in a cooling only climate orcompletely interior zones in any climate. In these situations, a

recommended control sequence is as follows: the air handling unitsupplies a constant cold temperature (say 55 degrees F) air.Each VAV box modulates from maximum position (fully open) tominimum position (fully closed) through the control range of theroom thermostat. The justification for allowing full close-offin interior zones, in light of IAQ concerns, is that the peopleload plus lights in an interior zone are substantial, usuallyamounting to 50 percent of the zone load or more. This is truefor perimeter zones in a cooling only climate also, but to alesser extent. So , if people are present, and thus the lightsare on, the load will be above the minimum anyway. Therefore,the minimum is not needed.

are out, the load may fall below where a ventilation determinedlimit would come into play, but since the people are gone, noventilation is needed.

If the people are gone and the lights

c-2-20 For zones that need heating, there are two recommendedsituations. For the very cold climate when the peak heating loadon the exterior wall is greater than 400 Btuh per linear foot ofwall (including infiltration), a separate skin heating system maybe used consisting of baseboard hot water convectors.Two-position electric spring-return control valves should beinstalled in each zone. Thus each perimeter zone will be servedby a VAV terminal unit for cooling and a corresponding section ofhot water convector for heating. The zone thermostat shouldcontrol both the VAV damper actuator and hot water valve actuatorin sequence at the cooling and heating setpoint.should have a mechanical minimum position for ventilation airwhich would be field set during the testing and balancing phaseof installation.

The VAV damper

183



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ,

̀- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 9999970 0271874 5 T b ai


a) For a mild or moderate heating situation when thepeak heating load on the exterior wall is less than 400 Btuh perlinear foot of wall, the following arrangement is recommended.

Each zone should be served by the series fan-powered VAV box witha hot water heating coil and overhead supply diffusers.thermostat should modulate the VAV damper closed to themechanically field set minimum position at the cooling setpoint.On the further drop in space temperature to the heating setpoint,the hot water valve should open (using a modulating electricspring-return actuator) to allow control of heating. An

alternate arrangement uses a parallel fan-powered VAV box withheating coil. The VAV box fan motor should be started when theVAV damper closes to a supply rate of 4 air changes per hour.

The

b) Since the use of fan-powered boxes adds several

hundred dollars per zone of first cost, the zoned baseboard heatoption (described for very cold climates) may be considered, evenin mild climates.

c) In perimeter zones there will be a need to setbackthe temperature in many buildings when there is no occupancy.This is generally accomplished by a night setback thermostatwhich can bring the heating system back on line to maintain thesetback temperature.

c - 2 . 2 1 In perimeter zones with a VAV cooling system and aseparate perimeter heating system, design controls so that

occupants cannot adjust thermostats for simultaneous heating andcooling. This can be done by using a thermostat with cooling andheating setpoints integrated so that ranges of possibleadjustment do not overlap.

c -2 .22 Systems that are to be shut down or setback duringunoccupied periods can present special problems. The greatestload will occur during start-up. The supply air or coil shall becapable of bringing the temperature back to design in areasonable time without ill effects. For instance, the designermust be careful that the temperature of supply air during

start-up is not too far below the room dew point temperature toprevent condensation on diffusers.

Specify a method for building warm-up after setback.Many systems contain totally interior zones that have beendesigned without heat. The space, after setback over a weekend,can require an unacceptably long period of time to come up totemperature. This warm-up sequence could be accomplished byusing a microprocessor-based thermostat with a built-in automatic

184



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1003/3 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273895 432 m

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


changeover. The warm-up cycle would be as follows: in the

morning the air handling unit is turned on (typically by the samedevice that turned the unit off for setback).water coil in the AHU is activated, and the thermostats aresignaled to warm-up action.thermostats thus open up the air dampers to warm up the space tothe thermostat setpoint. After the warm-up period, thethermostats are signaled to return to normal action for coolingand the M U hot water coil is deactivated.

A central hot

During the warm-up the interior zone

C-2.23actuators provided are often inadequately sized and are notcapable of performing their specified duty. Paying specialattention to submittals in this area or specifying pilotpositioners could help avoid many problems.

The designer should be aware that pneumatic damper

C - 2 . 2 4design air volume to an undesirable low air distribution level(in non-fan-powered systems).

Note that use of air troffer lighting return may reduce

C-2.25 Modulate the capacity of the supply fan, givingattention to the method chosen. Be aware that all of theavailable methods, including variable speed, inlet guide vanes,controllable pitch vane axial, and even discharge dampers, haveproblems in Navy VAV systems. Feedback: Inlet guide vanes areoften found to be inoperable due to poor maintenance. They arenot the trouble-free devices that the designers think they are.It is recommended that supply air fans under 10 horsepower beforward curved fans with inlet guide vanes. Supply fans largerthan 10 horsepower should be equipped with a variable frequencydrive (VFD). When designing a system with a VFD, the followingguides may be of help.

c-3.00 Semence of Operation. For suggested sequence ofoperations, refer to par. 8.5.

C-4.00 Svstem Commissioninq. For recommended commissioningprocedures, refer to pars. 8.6 and 8.6.7 which specifically

address VAV systems.

C-4-01 ODeration and Maintenance Personnel Traininq. It issuggested that training sessions of operation and maintenance

185



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,`̀ `,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



APPENDIX DVARIABLE SPEED DRIVES (VFD)

D-1.00 Introduction

D-1.01 Scone and Criteria. This appendix is intended toprovide basic information on the principles of operation ofVFD's, description of different types of VFD's, guidance on theproper application of VFD's, and installation guidelines to

ensure successful operation of VFD's. Over the last few years,the VFD has become one of the most effective motor controllersavailable for varying the speed of squirrel-cage inductionmotors. VFD's save energy, reduce electrical consumption,enhance equipment performance, are highly reliable, and havebecome affordable. Much of the material presented in thisAppendix was developed by Mr. Solomon S. Turkel, SeniorInstructor and Course Author for Advanced Technologies Marketing

and Service (ATMS) Inc., Baltimore, MD.

D-1-02 Terminoloav. VFD's drives are sometimes calledadjustable frequency controllers (AFC's). It is incorrect tocall them inverters or even adjustable speed drives (ASD's). Theterm 'IASD" refers to many types of adjustable speed drives,including belt or gear drives, eddy-current clutches, variable-pitch sheave drives, and DC systems, as well as VFD's. The VFDis the only type of motor drive that controls the speed of an ACinduction motor by changing the frequency and voltageappropriately.incorporates an electronic control section, an electromagneticand semiconductor power section, and typical components used withstandard motor controllers. Currently, available sizes rangefrom 1/3 horsepower (hp) to thousands of hp.

The VFD microprocessor-based motor controller

D-l. 3 Oneration. The principles of operation of VFD's areclosely related to basic motor theory. During operation, thestator's rotating magnetic field, which is created by the AC linepower to the motor, induces a voltage in the rotor. This inducedvoltage causes a current to flow in the rotor, which createsmagnetic fields with north and south poles. The synchronousspeed of an AC induction motor is dependent upon the number of

poles in the stator and the frequency of the line power applied.The basic equation is as follows:

Speed = (120 times frequency) divided by numberof poles

From this equation , a four-pole motor operating at 60Hz will have synchronous speed of 1800 rpm. When a VFD suppliespower to an AC motor, it has the capability to provide a voltage

186



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,

` ---



APPENDIX D (Continued)

at a frequency from less than 1 Hz to about 120 Hz. This means

that the motor may run extremely slow or very fast, depending onthe frequency supplied; and the amplitude of the voltage suppliedmust be proportional to the frequency to ensure the propervolts/hertz ratio for the specific motor.a motor is determined by the ratio of voltage applied to themotor at a given frequency.

volts-per-hertz ratio will affect motor torque, temperature,speed, noise, and current draw. Thus, for a motor to produce itsrated torque at variable speeds, it is also necessary to controlthe voltage as well as the frequency supplied to the motor. Forexample, a 460 volt motor operating at 60 Hz will have a

volts/hertz ratio of 7.67 to 1. For a VFD to operate this motorat 30 Hz (half speed), the motor voltage must be reduced to 230volts to maintain the same torque characteristics for the motor.

Motors are designed with specific torque characteristics and areclassified accordingly.horsepower rating, their actual torque capability in the areas ofbreakaway torque, pull-up torque, peak torque, and full-loadtorque may be different, depending on their NEMA classifications.Typical designs are Type A, B, C, and D. Refer to NationalElectrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) MG-1, Motors andGenerators, for a detailed explanation of these NEMA designs andof motor torque capabilities.horsepower, the required torque at all speeds is the key tosuccessful, efficient operation of the VFD and its motor.

The output torque for

Failure to maintain the proper

While two motors may have the same

Although the motor is sized by

D-l. 4 W e s of VFD’s. Although VFD’s control the speed of anAC induction motor by varying the motor’s supplied voltage andfrequency of power, they do not all use the same designs in doingso.publication of this handbook are:

The major VFD designs commonly used at the time of

a) Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)

b) Current Source Inverter (CSI)

c) Voltage Source Inverter (VSI)

d) Flux Vector Drive

An understanding of these different designs, along with theiradvantages and disadvantages will be beneficial to correctlymatch the VFD with the motor in a specific application.

187



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~ ~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9999970 027L898 141 111

MIL-HDBK-1003/3


D-1.04.1 PWM Desisn

a) The PWM drive has become the most commonly used

drive controller because it works well with motors ranging insize from about 1/2 hp to 500 hp. A significant reason for itspopularity is that it's highly reliable, affordable, and reflectsthe least amount of harmonics back into its power source. Most

units are rated either 230 volts or 460 volts, three-phase, andprovide output frequencies from about 2 Hz to 400 Hz.manufacturers market the PWM controller.

Nearly 100

b) In the PWM drive, an AC line supply voltage isbrought into the input section. From here, the AC voltage passes

into a converter section that uses a diode bridge converter andlarge DC capacitors to create and maintain a stable, fixed DC bus

voltage. The DC voltage passes into the inverter section usuallyfurnished with insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT's), whichregulate both voltage and frequency to the motor to produce anear sine wave like output.

c) The term "pulse width modulation" explains how eachtransition of the alternating voltage output is actually a seriesof short pulses of varying widths.pulses in each half cycle, the average power produced has a sine-like output. The number of transitions from positive to negative

per second determines the actual frequency to the motor.

By varying the width of the

d) Switching speeds of the IGBT's in a PWM drive canrange from 2 kHz to 15 kHz. Today's newer PWM designs use powerIGBT's, which operate at these higher frequencies. By havingmore pulses in every half cycle, the motor whine associated withVFD applications is reduced because the motor windings are nowoscillating at a frequency beyond the spectrum of human hearing.Also, the current wave shape to the motor is smoothed out ascurrent spikes are removed.

e) PWM's have the following advantages:

(i) Excellent input power factor due to fixedDC bus voltage.

(2) No motor cogging normally found withsix-step inverters.

( 3 ) Highest efficiencies: 92 percent to96 percent.

188



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 = 9 7 9 7 7 7 0 027L899 O88 II


(4) Compatibility with multimotor applications.

(5) Ability to ride through a 3 to 5 Hz

power loss.

( 6 ) Lower initial cost.

f) The following disadvantages, however, should alsobe considered:

(i) Motor heating and insulation breakdown in someapplications due to high frequency switching of transistors.

(2) Non-regenerative operation.

( 3 ) Line-side power harmonics (depending on theapplication and size of the drive).

D-1.04.2 CSI Desian. In the CSI drive design, the incomingpower source is converted to DC voltage in an SCR convertersection, which regulates the incoming power and produces avariable DC bus voltage.of the SCR's as needed to maintain the proper volt/hertz ratio.SCR's are also used in the inverter section to produce thevariabe frequency output to the motor.current regulating and require a large internal inductor tooperate, as well as a motor load.

This voltage is regulated by the firing

CSI drives are inherently

a) CSI's have the following advantages:

(1) Reliability due to inherent current limitingoperation.

( 2 ) Regenerative power capability.

( 3 ) Simple circuitry.

b) The following are disadvantages which should beconsidered in the use of CSI technology:

(1) Large power harmonic generation back into thepower source.

( 2 ) Cogging below 6 Hz due to square wave output.

(3) Use of large and costly inductor.

189



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,

` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 W 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 027LSûO b2T E


(4) High voltage spikes to motor windings.

(5) Load dependent; poor for multimotorapplications.

(6) Poor input power factor due to SCR convertersection.

D-1.04.3 VSI Desian.drive in that it also uses an SCR converter section to regulateDC bus voltage. Its inverter section produces a six-step output,but is not a current regulator like the CSI drive. This drive isconsidered a voltage regulator and uses transistors, SCR’s, orgate turn off thyristors (GTO’s) to generate an adjustablefrequency output to the motor.

The VSI drive is very similar to a CSI

a) VSI’s have the following advantages:

(1) Basic simplicity in design.

(2) Applicable to multimotor operations.

(3) Operation not load dependent.

b) As with other types of drives, there aredisadvantages:

(1) Large power harmonic generation back into thepower source.

(2) Poor input power factor due to SCR convertersection.

(3) Cogging below 6 Hz due to square wave output.

(4) Non-regenerative operation.

D-1.04-4 Flux Vector PWM Drives

a) PWM drive technology is still considered new and is

AC drives have always been limited

This has changed

continuously being refined with new power switching devices andsmart 32-bit microprocessors.to normal torque applications while high torque, low rpmapplications have been the domain of DC drives.

recently with the introduction of a new breed of PWM drive, theflux vector drive.

190



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



~ ~

MIL-HDBK-3003/3 m 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273901 5 b b


b) Flux vector drives use a method of controllingtorque similar to that of DC drive systems, including wide speedcontrol range with quick response. Flux vector drives have the

same power section as PWM drives, but use a sophisticated closedloop control from the motor to the drive's microprocessor. Themotor's rotor position and speed is monitored in real time via aresolver or digital encoder to determine and control the motor'sactual speed, torque, and power produced.

c) By controlling the inverter section in response toactual load conditions at the motor in a real time mode, superiortorque control can be obtained. The personality of the motormust be programmed into or learned by the drive in order for itto run the vector control algorithms. In most cases, specialmotors are required due to the torque demands expected of the

motor.

d) The following are advantages of this new drivetechnology:

(i) Excellent control of motor speed, torque, andpower.

(2) Quick response to changes in load, speed, andtorque commands.

(3) Ability to provide 100 percent rated torque at

zero speed.

(4) Lower maintenance cost as compared to DCmotors and drives.

e) The following are disadvantages:

(1) Higher initial cost as compared to standardPWM drives.

(2) Requires special motor in most cases.

(3) Drive setup parameters are complex.

While flux vector technology offers superior performance forcertain special applications, it would be considered "overkill"for most applications well served by standard PWM drives.

D-l.05 Armlication of VFD's to Sr>ecific Loads. VFD's are themost effective energy savers in pump and fan applications, and

191



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---




they enhance process operations, particularly where flow controlis involved. VFD’s soft start capabilities decrease electricalstresses and line voltage sags associated with full voltage motorstart-ups, especially when driving high-enertia loads. For themotor to produce the required torque for the load, the VFD musthave ample current capability to drive the motor. It isimportant to note that machine torque is independent of motorspeed and that load horsepower increases linearly with rpm.Individual load types are as follows:

a) Constant torque loads. Constant torque loadsrepresent 90 percent of general industrial machines (other thanpumps and fans). Examples of these load types include generalmachinery, hoists, conveyors, printing presses, positivedisplacement pumps, some mixers and extruders, reciprocating

compressors, as well as rotary compressors.

b) Constant horsepower loads. Constant horsepowerloads are most often found in the machine tool industry andcenter driven winder applications.horsepower loads include winders, core-driven reels, wheelgrinders, large driller machines, lathes, planers, boringmachines, and core extruders.

Examples of constant

Traditionally, these loads were considered DC driveapplications only. With high performance flux vector VFD’s nowavailable, many DC drive applications of this type can be nowhandled by VFD‘s.

c) Variable torque loads. Variable torque loads aremost often found in variable flow applications, such as fans andpumps. Examples of applications include fans, centrifugalblowers, centrifugal pumps, propeller pumps, turbine pumps,agitators, and axial compressors. VFD’s offer the greatestopportunity for energy savings when driving these loads becausehorsepower varies as the cube of speed and torque varies assquare of speed for these loads. For example, if the motor speedis reduced 20 percent, motor horsepower is reduced by a cubic

relationship ( - 8 x . 8 x . 8 ) , or 51 percent. As such, utilitiesoften offer subsidies to customers investing in VFD technologyfor their applications. Many VFD manufacturers have freesoftware programs available for customers to calculate anddocument potential energy savings by using VFD’s.

D-l. 6 If any of the followingoperations apply, use extra care in selecting a VFD and its setupparameters.

SDecial Alslslications of VFD’s.

192



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---




a) VFD operating more than one motor. The total peakcurrents of motor loads under worst operating conditions must becalculated. The VFD must be sized based on this maximum currentrequirement. Additionally, individual motor protection must beprovided here for each motor.

b) Load is spinning or coasting when the VFD isstarted. This is very often the case with fan applications.When a VFD is first started, it begins to operate at a lowfrequency and voltage and gradually ramps up to a preset speed.If the load is already in motion, it will be out of sync with theVFD. The VFD will attempt to pull the motor down to the lowerfrequency, which may require high current levels, usually causingan overcurrent trip. Because of this, VFD manufacturers offerdrives with an option for synchronization with a spinning load;

this VFD ramps at a different frequency.

c) Power supply source is switched while the VFD isrunning. This occurs in many buildings, such as hospitals, whereloads are switched to standby generators in the event of a poweroutage. Some drives will ride through a brief power outage whileothers may not. If your application is of this type, it must bereviewed with the drive manufacturer for a final determination ofdrive capability.

d) Hard to start load. These are the motors that dimthe lights in the building when you hit the start button.

Remember, the VFD is limited in the amount ofovercurrent it can produce for a given period of time. Theseapplications may require oversizing of the VFD for higher currentdemands.

e) Critical starting or stopping times. Someapplications may require quick starting or emergency stopping ofthe load. In either case, high currents will be required of thedrive. Again, oversizing of the VFD may be required.

f) External motor disconnects required between themotor and the VFD . Service disconnects at motor loads are veryoften used for maintenance purposes. Normally, removing a loadfrom a VFD while operating does not pose a problem for the VFD .

On the other hand, introducing a load to a VFD by closing a motordisconnect while the VFD is operational can be fatal to the VFD.

When a motor is started at full voltage, as would happen in thiscase, high currents are generated, usually about six times thefull load amperes of the motor current. The VFD would see these

193



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 E 9999970 0271904 2 7 5 iW


high currents as being well beyond its capabilities and would gointo a protective trip or fail altogether.this condition is to interlock the VFD run permissive circuitwith the service disconnects via an auxiliary contact at theservice disconnect. When the disconnect is closed, a permissiverun signal restarts the VFD at low voltage and frequency.

A simple solution for

g) Power factor correction capacitors being switchedor existing on the intended motor loads.factor capacitors usually generates power disturbances in thedistribution system.this.for these applications.

Switching of power

Many VFD's can and will be affected byIsolation transformers or line reactors may be required

Power factor correction at VFD-powered motor loads

is not necessary as the VFD itself does this by using DCinternally and then inverting it into an AC output to the motor.VFD manufacturers warn against installing capacitors at the VFDoutput.

D-l. 7 Sizina VFD's for the Load. To properly size a VFD foran application, you must understand the requirements of the load.The torque ratings are as important as the horsepower ratings.Every load has distinct torque requirements that vary with theload's operation; these torques must be supplied by the motor viathe VFD. You must have a clear understanding of these torques.

a) Breakaway torque: torque required to start a loadin motion (typically greater than the torque required to maintainmotion).

b) Accelerating torque: torque required to bring theload to operating speed within a given time.

c) Running torque: torque required to keep the loadmoving at all speeds.

d) Peak torque: occasional peak torque required by

the load, such as a load being dropped on a conveyor.

e) Holding torque: torque required by the motor whenoperating as a brake, such as down hill loads and high inertiamachines.

D-l. 8 Guidelines for Matchinq VFD to Motor. The followingguidelines will help ensure a correct match of VFD and motor:

194



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -




a) Define the operating profile of the load to whichthe VFD is to be applied.listed in par. D-1.07.record the motor's current draw under all operating conditionswill help in doing this. Obtain the highest 'Ipeak" currentreadings under the worst conditions. Also, see if the motor hasbeen working in an overloaded condition by checking the motorfull-load amperes (FLA). An overloaded motor operating atreduced speeds may not survive the increased temperatures as aresult of the reduced cooling effects of the motor at these lowerspeeds.

Include any or all of the torquesUsing a recording true rms ammeter to

b) Determine why the load operation needs to beVery often VFD's have been applied to applicationshanged.

where all that was required was a "soft start" reduced voltage

controller.to change the load's speed as required. In those applicationswhere only one speed change is required, a VFD may not benecessary or practical.

The need for the VFD should be based on the ability

c) Size the VFD to the motor based on the maximumcurrent requirements under peak torque demands. Do not size theVFD based on horsepower ratings. Many applications have failedbecause of this. Remember, the maximum demands placed on themotor by the load must also be met by the VFD.

d) Evaluate the possibility of required oversizing of

the VFD. Be aware that motor performance (breakaway torque, forexample) is based upon the capability of the VFD used and theamount of current it can produce. Depending on the type of loadand duty cycle expected, oversizing of the VFD may be required.

D-l. O9 Kev VFD SDecification Parameters. The most importantinformation to be included in a VFD specification are continuouscurrent rating, overload current rating, and line voltage ofoperation.

a) Continuous run current rating. This is the maximum

rms current the VFD can safely handle under all operatingconditions at a fixed ambient temperature (usually 40 degrees C).Motor full load sine wave currents must be equal to or less thanthis rating.

b) Overload current rating. This is an inversetime/current rating that is the maximum current the VFD canproduce for a given time frame.to 150 percent overcurrent for 1 minute, depending on the

Typical ratings are 110 percent

195



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~

MIL - HDBK- 1003 /3 H 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0271906 048 0


manufacturer.oversizing the VFD .

the VFD for the currents needed by the motor for breakawaytorque.

Higher current ratings can be obtained byThis rating is very important when sizing

c) Line voltage. As with any motor controller, anoperating voltage must be specified. VFD’s are designed tooperate at some nominal voltage such as 2 4 0 volts AC or 480 voltsAC, with an allowable voltage variation of plus or minus 10percent. Most motor starters will operate beyond this 10 percentvariation, but VFD’s will not and will go into a protective trip.A recorded voltage reading of line power deviations is highlyrecommended for each application.

d) Additional considerations. The following

information is helpful when applying drives and should beincluded and verified prior to selection of a drive:

Starting torque currents

Running torque currents

Peak loading currents

Duty cycle

Load type

Speed precision required

Performance (response)

Line voltages (deviations)

Altitude

Ambient temperature

Environment

Motoring/regenerating load

Stopping requirements

Motor nameplate data

Input signals required

196



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~

~~~ ~

MIL-HDBK-1003/3 W 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0271907 T 8 4


(16) Output signals required

D-1.10 VFD Installation and Start-Ur>. Over half of drive

failures are a result of improper installation and start-up.Careful planning of your VFD installation will help avoid manyproblems. Be sure the VFD specification requires furnishing ofthe drive‘s operation and maintenance manual.considerations include temperature and line power qualityrequirements, along with electrical connections, grounding, faultprotection, motor protection, and environmental parameters.

Important

a) Temperature. Equipment should be located in areaswhich are well within manufacturer’s specified temperature limitsand are well ventilated to remove generated heat.installing units in mezzanines, direct sunlight, or near external

heat sources to avoid unpredictable temperature rises. Providesupplemental cooling if these areas cannot be avoided.

Avoid

b) Supply Line Power Quality. The line voltage to thedrive input should vary no more than plus or minus 10 percent toavoid tripping the unit via a protective fault.calculations must take this into account when running conductorslong distances from the power source.

Voltage drop

c) Electrical Connections. Size VFD line and loadconductors to conform to NFPA 70.

d) Grounding. In addition to running a groundingconductor back to the electrical service entrance, bring agrounding conductor back from the motor to the VFD’s internalgrounding terminal.required to minimize interference and for proper operation of theground-fault protection function.

This direct motor ground to the VFD is

e) Fault Protection. Many VFD‘s have short-circuitprotection (usually in the form of fuses) already installed bythe manufacturer.units. Smaller units (1/3 to 5 hp) normally require external

fuse protection. In either case, the selection and sizing ofthese fuses is critical for semiconductor protection in the eventof a fault. The manufacturer’s recommendations must be followedwhen installing or replacing fuses for the VFD . Be sure totorque-bolt fuses in place according to the manufacturer’sspecification to ensure fast operation of fuses in case of afault.

This is usually the case on larger horsepower

197



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~~

MI L - HDBK- L 0 0 3 / 3 9999770 0271708 910 W


f) Motor Protection. Motors require overloadprotection. The most common practice is the use of a motor

overcurrent relay system that will protect all three phases andprotect against single-phasing. This type of protection willrespond to motor overcurrent conditions of an overloaded motor,but will not detect overtemperature conditions.

A motor operating at reduced speeds will havereduced cooling; as a result, it may fail due to thermalbreakdown of the motor windings insulation. Thus, the optimumprotection for a motor is thermal sensing of the motor windings.This sensing is then interlocked with the VFD’s control circuit.This is highly recommended for any motor that is to be operatedfor extended periods of time at low speeds.

9) Environment

(1)Humidity and Moisture. As is the case with allelectrical and electronic equipment, high humidity and corrosiveatmospheres are a concern. Drive units should be installed in anoncorrosive location whenever possible, with ambient humidityranging between O to 95 percent noncondensing. Avoid locationssubject to rain, dust, corrosive fumes, or vapors, and saltwater. in some cases, appropriate NEMA enclosures may bespecified where some of these locations cannot be avoided.Consult VFD manufacturers about the location and applicationbefore doing so.

(2) Vibration. Do not locate VFD’s near vibratingequipment unless appropriate vibration isolation methods areemployed.

( 3 ) Line Transmitted Transients. The VFD is asolid-state electronic device, therefore, surge and transientprotection (from lightning strikes, circuit switching, largemotor starting, etc.) should be specified, either integral to theVFD or external, as appropriate.

D-l.11 Start-up Procedures

a) Successful installation of VFD’s, as with nearlyall electrical equipment, is derived from an orderly, wellplanned start-up procedure. After reading the entire VFD manualand before energizing the VFD, make a physical inspection of theVFD and look for the following:

198



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```, ,̀```,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



f l I L - HDBK- L 0 0 3 / 3 e 9 9 9 7 7 0 0273705 8 5 7 m


(1) Any moisture or debris (metal shavings forexample) inside the equipment.

( 2 ) Damage or dents to the enclosure, damaged orloose components and wires, and disconnected terminal conectors.

(3) Possible restrictions to airflow at thecooling fans or heat sink.

(4) Unremoved shipping blocks or tapes at powercontactors, relays, etc.

b) In addition to the VFD itself, you should also makea visual inspection of the entire system, including motors,disconnect switches, circuit breakers, controls, load components,

control devices (limit, float, pressure switches, etc.).

c) Finally, you should make an intense and thoroughcheck of the following items:

( 2 )and rotation).

(3current).

(4)overloads, thermal

( 5 )correctly?)

Connections (line, load, and ground).

Motor (horsepower, full-load amperes, voltage,

VFD (input/output voltages, maximum output

Protective devices (circuit breaker, fuses,devices).

Disconnects (are they in place and sized

incoming line power voltage measurements tothe VFD (A-B phase, B-C phase, C-Ä phase). -

d) It is recommended that you use a VFD start-up guide

Make the report part ofheet/report in your start-up procedure.the project's contractual requirements within the specificationsection covering the VFD. The benefits of using such a reportincludes verifying key parameters prior to start-up, documentingthe installation for warranty claims, and aiding introubleshooting for future problems. The following instrumentsshould be available at the VFD location for start-up:

199



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



~ ~

PiIL- iDBK-L003 / 3 H 7 9 9 9 9 7 0 027LîLO 5'79 E


(1) True rms multimeter capable of reading AC/DC

voltages up to 750 volts.

(2) True rms clamp-on ammeter capable of readingthe VFD's maximum current output.

( 3 ) Photo tachometer to verify shaft output speedat load.

( 4 ) Current/voltage signal generator to generate areference analog signal to VFD (4 to 20 milliamperes or O to 5volts). (This is extremely useful on HVAC applications where thebuilding automation system designed to control the VFD is notready at time of start-up.)

(5) Oscilloscope to check wave shapes of VFDoutput to motor. These wave shapes can be compared to thoseprovided in the start-up manual, or recorded (via Polaroidcamera) for future comparison during troubleshooting ormaintenance. The scope also can be used to check volts/hertzratio.

e) Make up a complete final check, via a check-offlist, of electrical and mechanical components to be sure thatthey are set correctly. This includes valves, dampers, limitswitches, steady-state voltage, and current valves.

f) Station people at key locations (motor, controllerpanel, load(s) etc.)

g) A proper start-up can be considered complete only

You can verifywhen the VFD is operated at full load. This is important becauseyou then can make meaningful drive adjustments.this by actually checking the FLA and comparing the value to thaton the motor nameplate.

h) When the start-up command is given, watch, listen,and smell for anything unusual. Once start-up has beenaccomplished, allow the system to run a few hours before takingtest readings for future comparison.

D-l. 2 VFD Generated EM1 and Harmonic Distortion Concerns.Harmonics are generated by nonlinear devices which rectify theincoming AC voltage to DC and then invert it back to AC, as isthe case with a VFD running a motor. Harmonics from nonlineardevices are odd multiples of the fundamental frequency (third,

fifth, seventh, etc.). Some parts of the electrical distribution

200



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -




system designed for 60 Hz can have significant losses at harmonicfrequencies, which causes higher operating temperatures andshortened component life. The harmonics generated by a VFDaffect not only the load it serves (the motor), but are also

reflected back into the power distribution system, thus affectingother devices connected to the distribution system. Reference 13addresses the motor heating and life expectancy concerns. Thephysical location of the VFD and its interface point with thepower system within the facility are important. Do not locatethe VFD near other electronic equipment, including radarequipment, radio equipment, computers, hospital diagnostic andlife support equipment, or telecommunications equipment.Minimize the length of line and load power leads as much aspossible. Always run line and load conductors in a groundedcontinuous metallic conduit system. Since most mechanical

systems and controls now include solid-state electronics, takeprecautions to prevent their damage or malfunction due to VFDgenerated harmonics.circuit when the VFD does not include adequate filteringinternally for the specific application.design engineer for help with resolving interference and harmonicdistortion concerns.

Filters can be added to the VFD input

Consult the electrical

D-l. 3 VFD-Driven Premium Efficiency Motor Concerns. Althoughbeyond the scope of this handbook, it should be noted that notall premium efficiency motors are suitable for control by VFD's.During the design stage, contact both VFD manufacturers and

premium efficiency motor manufacturers to ensure compatibilityfor the application at hand.

D-l. 14 Troubleshootins VFD Problems. Although important inensuring long-term successful VFD operation, it is beyond thescope of this handbook to cover troubleshooting of VFD problems.The subject of troubleshooting VFD's during their operatinglifetime is well covered in References 6 and 7.

REFERENCES

1. Understanding Variable Speed Drives - Part 1, S. S. Turkel,Electrical Construction and Maintenance (EC&M), February 1995.

2. Understanding Variable Speed Drives - Part 2, S. S. Turkel,EC&M, March 1995.

3 . Understanding Variable Speed Drives - Part 3 , S . S. Turkel,EC&M, April 1995.

2 0 1



--`,,,,,`,``̀ ``,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



~ ~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 7 7 9 7 9 7 0 02717lJ2 341 m


4. Understanding Variable Speed Drives - Part 4, S. S. Turkel,EC&M, May 1995.

5. Understanding Variable Speed Drives - Part 5, S. S . Turkel,EC&M, June 1995.

6 . Understanding Variable Speed Drives - Part 6, S . S . Turkel,EC&M, July 1995.

7. Troubleshooting Variable Speed Drives, S. S. Turkel, EC&M,May 1995.

8. Understanding Modern Motors and Controllers, R. J. Lawrie,EC&M, March 1995.

9. Pumping for Dollars, D. W. Kelly, Consulting- SpecifyingEngineer, August 1995.

10. NEMA ICs 3.1-90, Safety Standards for Construction and Guidefor Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-SpeedDrive Systems.

11. NEMA ICs 7-93, Industrial Control and Systems - Adjustable-Speed Drives.

12. IEEE 519-92, IEEE Recommended Practice and Requirements forHarmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems.

13. The Impact of Adjustable Speed Drives on AC Induction MotorHeating, Efficiency, and Life Expectancy, H . T. Maase andR. Rundus, U.S. Army CERL, Champaign, IL, presented at 1995 USACEElectrical and Mechanical Engineering Training Conference,June 5-9, 1995, St. Louis, MO.

202



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



~ ~ ~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 9999970 0 2 7 L l b 3 288 =


VFD Start-up Report

Report No.:

Report Date:

Customer:

Contact Name: Phone Number:

Address

City/Base: State/Country: Zip:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment Manufacturer: Model No.

Equipment Location: Serial No.:

List of Options:

Installation Notes:

Type of Load: Load Location:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor Manufacturer: Horsepower:- ervice Factor:

Voltage: RPM Frequency: Frame

Current: Insulation Class: NEMA Class:

Load Rotation: Overload Heater Size:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

installation inspection

Clearances - Front: - ack: - eft:- ight:- ottom:-Grounding Method: Ground Wire Size:Isolation Transformer (Y/N) Motor Disconnects (Y/N)Details for Yes Answers:

Ambient Temperature: Exposure

203



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



flIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9997970 027Z9Z4 Z L 4 rn


Electrical Inspection

Incoming Voltages - A -B Phase:- -C Phase:- -A Phase:-

A-Neutral: B-Neutral: C-Neutral:

External Control Voltages (source): Fused

External Process Signals (4-20 mA, 3-15 psi, 0-10 vdc, 0-250ohm)Process Signal Sources:.................................................................

Set Up Parameters

Accel Time (sec) _. Decel Time (sec) - econd Accel/Decel:-

Auto Restart (Y/N) Multiple Attempt Restart (Y/N):

Maximum Speed: Minimum Speed: Extended Freq. (Y/N):-

Torque Boost (level) Gain Offset:

Set Up Notes:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operational Parameters

Inverter BypassLine Current A Phase: A Phase:

B Phase: B Phase:C Phase: C Phase:

Load Current A Phase: A Phase:B Phase: B Phase:C Phase: C Phase:

DC Bus Voltage:- eat Sink Temperature (1hr run time):

Frequency Output at O % Reference Signal:

Frequency Output at 100% Reference Signal:

Start Up Complete (Y/N):- ompletion Date:Start Up Completed By:Remarks

204



--`,,,,,`,`````,,,`,```,`,```,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-L003/3 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 027LïL5 0 5 0

REFERENCES

NOTE: THE FOLLOWING REFERENCED DOCUMENTS FORM A PART OF THISHANDBOOK TO THE EXTENT SPECIFIED HEREIN. USERS OF THIS HANDBOOKSHOULD REFER TO THE LATEST REVISIONS OF CITED DOCUMENTS UNLESSOTHERWISE DIRECTED.

FEDERAL/MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS, BULLETINS,HANDBOOKS, DESIGN MANUALS, AND NAVFAC GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS:

Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from the NavalPublishing and Printing Service Office (NPPSO), StandardizationDocument Order Desk, Building 4D, 700 Robbins Avenue,Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.

STANDARDS

MIL-STD-1691

HANDBOOKS

MIL-HDBK-423

MIL-HDBK-IOO8B

MIL-HDBK-1011/1

MIL-HDBK-1035

Construction and Material Schedulefor Military Medical and DentalFacilities.

High-Altitude Electromagnetic Pulse(HEMP) Protection for FixedcpdTransportable Ground-BasedFacilities

Central Heating Plants

Exterior Distribution of UtilitySteam, High Temperature Water (HTW),Chilled Water, Natural Gas andCompressed Air

Industrial Ventilation Systems

Electrical Engineering CathodicProtection

Fire Protection f o r FacilitiesEngineering, Design, and Construction

Tropical Engineering

Family Housing

205



--`,,,,,`,```̀ `,,,`,```,`,̀ ``,,`-`-`,, ,̀,`,`,,`---



MIL-HDBK-1036 Bachelor Quarters

MIL-HDBK-1190 Facility Planning and Design Guide

MIL-HDBK-1191 Medical and Dental Treatment

Facilities Design and ConstructionCriteria

DESIGN MANUALS

DM-3.01 Plumbing Systems

SPECIFICATIONS

NFGS-15250 Mechanical Insulation

NFGS-15652 Central Refrigeration Equipment for

Air Conditioning

NFGS-15895 Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories

NFGS-15971 Space Temperature Control Systems

NFGS-15972 Direct Digital Control Systems

NAVFAC P-PUBLICATIONS AND MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS:

Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from the NavalPublishing and Printing Service Office (NPPSO), Standardization

Document Order Desk, Building 4D, 700 Robbins Avenue,Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.

P-PUBLICATIONS

P-89 Engineering Weather Data

MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION (MO) MANUALS

MO-209

MO-220

MO-230

Maintenance of Steam, Hot Water, andDistribution Systems

Maintenance and Operation of GasSystems

Maintenance Manual Petroleum FuelFacilities

206



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

,

̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



~ ~~ ~

f l I L -H D BK-1003 / 3 Ia 999997û 0273937 9 2 3 E

OTHER GOVEXNMENT DOCUMENTS AND PUBLICATIONS:

10 CFR Part 435 Energy Conservation VoluntaryPerformance Standards for Commercial andMulti-Family High Rise Residential

Buildings, Mandatory for New FederalBuildings

29 CFR Part 1910 Occupational Industry Safety and HealthStandards.

OPNAVINST 5100.23 Navy Occupational Safety and Health(NAVOSH) Program Manual.

DODINST 6055.12 DOD Hearing Conservation Program

(Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from the

Naval Publishing and Printing Service Office (NPPSO),Standardization Document Order Desk, Building 4D, 700 RobbinsAvenue, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094; private organizations maypurchase documents from the Superintendent of Documents,U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.)

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS:

Architectural and EngineeringInstructions, Design Criteria

CEGS-15950

ETL 94-2

TM 5-805-4

TM 5-815-2

Heating, Ventilating, and Air

Conditioning (WAC) Control Systems

Utility Meters in New and RenovatedFacilities

Noise and Vibration Control forMechanical Equipment

Energy Monitoring and ControlSystems (EMCS)

(Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from theNaval Publishing and Printing Service Office (NPPSO),Standardization Document Order Desk, Building 4D, 700 RobbinsAvenue, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094; private organizations maypurchase documents from the Superintendent of Documents,U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.)

207



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



NON-GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS:

AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

Industrial Ventilation - Manual ofRecommended Practice

(Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from AmericanConference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 6500Glenway Avenue, Bldg. D-7, Cincinnati, OH 45211-4438.)

AMERICAN MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION (AMCA)

AMCA 201 Fans and Systems

(Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from AmericanMovement and Control Association (AMCA), 30 West University

Drive, Arlington Heights, IL 60004.)

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING, ANDAIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. (ASHRAE)

ASHRAE Equipment Handbook

ASHRAE Handbook, Fundamentals

ASHRAE Handbook, Design of Smoke ControlSystems

ASHRAE Handbook, W A C Systems andApplications

ASHRAE Handbook, Refrigeration

ASHRAE Guideline 1

ASHRAE STD 15

ASHRAE STD 62

ASHRAE STD 90.1

Commissioning of HVAC Systems

Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration

Ventilation for Acceptable IndoorAir Quality

Energy Efficient Design of New BuildingsExcept Low-Rise Residential Buildings

(Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from theAmerican Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-conditioningEngineers, Inc. (ASHRAE), 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E., Atlanta, GA30329-2305.

2 0 8



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



MIL-HDBK-3003/3 = 7 7 9 9 9 7 0 0273939 7Tb II

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

NEMA MG-1 Motors and Generators

(Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from National

Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), 2101 L Street, N.W.,Suite 300, Washington, DC 20037.)

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

NFPA 9OA

NFPA 9OB

Standard for the Installation of AirConditioning and Ventilating Systems

Standard for the Installation of WarmAir Heating and Air Conditioning Systems

(Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available from theNational Fire Protection Association (NFPA), One BatterymarchPark, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269-9101.)

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC (UL)

UL 555s Standard for Safety Leakage RatedDampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems

(Unless otherwise indicated, copies are available fromUnderwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL ) , 333 Pfingsten Road,

Northbrook, IL 60062.

2 0 9



-- ̀

, , , , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀ ̀

, , , ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, ̀

, ̀ ̀ ̀

, , ̀

- ̀

- ̀

, , ̀

, , ̀

, ̀

, , ̀

---



GLOSSARY

ACGIH. American Conference of Governmental IndustrialHygienists.

ADP. Automated data processing.--FC. Adjustable frequency controller.-SD. Adjustable speed drive.

ASHRAE. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

ASME. American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

ATMS. Advanced Technologies Marketing and Service.

BLAST.

-FR.

Building loads analysis and system thermodynamics.

Code of Federal Regulations.-S I . Current source inverter.

-v. Control valve flow coefficient.

-DC. Direct digital controls.

DM. Design manual.

EFA

EFD

EMCS

EOD

ETL

FLA.

FMF

---

-

-

GTO

GWP.

HEPA.

-

-

Engineering field activity.

Engineering field division.

Energy monitoring and control system.

Explosive ordnance disposal.

Engineering technical letter.

Full-load amperes.

Fleet Marine Force.

Gate turn off thyristors.

Global warning potential.

High efficiency air.

210



- - ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -



~~ ~

NIL-HDBK-L003/3 m 9 9 9 9 9 7 0 0273923 354 IIMIL-HDBK-1003/3

HVAC. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.

IAQ. Indoor air quality.-

IGBT. Insulated bipolar transistor.

-V. Industrial ventilation.

MILCON. Military construction.

NAVFACENGCOM. Naval Facilities Engineering Command.

NEMA. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

NFESC. Naval Facilities Engineering Service Center.

NFGS. Naval facilities guide specification.

NFPA. National Fire Protection Association.

NPSH. Net positive suction head.-DP. Ozone depletion potential.

PC. Personal controller.

PD. Pressure dependent.-Pi. Pressure independent.--ID. Proportional, integral, and derivative.

-L. Project leader.

-VC. Polyvinyl chloride.

PWM. Pulse width modulated.-

SMACNA. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ NationalAssociation, Inc.

TM. Technical manual.-

-L. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.-PS. Uninterrupted power supply.

VAV. Variable air volume.

211



--` , , , , ,` ,` ` ` ` ` , , ,` ,` ` ` ,` ,` ` ` , ,` -` -` , ,` , ,` ,` , ,` ---



~ ~ ~~

MIL-HDBK-L003/3 rn 9 9 7 9 9 7 0 0 2 7 3 9 2 2 2 9 0 m

MIL-HDBK-l003/3

VFD . Variable frequency drive.

VSI. oltage source inverter.

W I . Variable voltage inverter.

CUSTODIANPREPARING ACTIVITY

NAVY - YD NAVY - YD

PROJECT NO.FACR-113 -

- ` , , , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ` ` , , ,

` ,

` ` ` ,

` ,

` ` ` , ,

` - ` - ` , ,

` , ,

` ,

` , ,

` - - -

Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning,

Documents

Transcript of Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning,